SBC-VAVr/t/a/f

USER MANUAL

SMART BUILDING SOLUTIONS

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual

Part Number 1E-04-00-0107

TM
© 2012 American Auto-Matrix

This document is protected by copyright and is the property of American Auto-Matrix. It may not be used or
copied in whole or in part for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without authorization. This
document does not constitute any warranty, expressed or implied.

Every effort has been made to ensure that all information was correct at the time of publication. American
Auto-Matrix reserves the right to alter specifications, performance, capabilities and presentation of this
product at any time.

American Auto-Matrix and Auto-Matrix are trademarks of American Auto-Matrix and are not to be used for
publication without the written consent of American Auto-Matrix.

All other brand names or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective com-
panies or organizations.

WORLD HEADQUARTERS

American Auto-Matrix
One Technology Lane
Export, Pennsylvania 15632-8903 USA
Tel (1) 724-733-2000
Fax (1) 724-327-6124
Email [email protected]
www.aamatrix.com
 REVISION HISTORY

4/12/2012
(Corresponds to firmware revision 4.08)
. Added information regarding new Unoccupied Flow Override feature
. Added information regarding Relative Humidity information
. General document corrections and updates.

Version 2.2
(Corresponds to firmware revision 4.00)

. Implementation of Indoor Air Quality variant

. Universal Input 3 added for IAQ variant
. Corrected various spelling errors found during manual review
. Refined configuration steps for Dual Duct Configuration
. Removed VAVr model references from manual, as device is no longer manufactured or sold.
. Addition of Calculated Setpoint Display Functionality

Version 2.1
(Corresponds to firmware revision 3.10)

. Changed number of triacs on SBC-VAVta and SBC-VAVtf models from three (3) to five (5) in §1,
§1.2.2.1, §1.4.4, §1.4.5, and §2.4.3.5.
. Added section 2.2 Changing the Actuator Orientation.
. Added FF00;MS to §3.8.1 and Appendix A.
. Corrected entries in Appendix A for FA05;AE and FA05;AS.
. Corrected transformer specification in §1.5.5 to be class 2.
. Sorted table entries in Appendix A alphabetically.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) iii

REVISION HISTORY

iv SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

 ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual includes an overview of, and instructions for wiring, installing, and configuring the SBC-VAV(r/
t/a/f) controllers. Also included are definitions of the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) channels and attributes, and features
of the SBC-STAT when used with SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers.

This manual is divided into the following sections:

. Section 1: Overview, provides an introduction to and descriptions of the four (4) SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) type
controllers and their features and components.
. Section 2: Wiring and Installation, details wiring and installation procedures including mounting,
supplying power, connecting to the communications network, and connecting inputs and outputs.
. Section 3: SBC-VAV Channels and Attributes, defines the channels and attributes of the SBC-
VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers.
. Section 4: Configuration, provides instructions for configuring the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers for use
in various applications.
. Section 5: SBC-STAT Features, describes the SBC-STAT setpoint adjustment and LED, and the
SBC-STAT3 menus when connected to an SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f).
. Appendix A: PUP Channels and Attributes, lists the PUP channel numbers for each channel, the
PUP data type, read/write access, type of storage, SoloPro for Windows location, and a description of
each attribute.
. Appendix B: PUP Data Type Codes, lists the hexadecimal numbers, digit format, and a meaning of
PUP data types.

This document contains certain style and formatting conventions for conveying information in a clear and
concise manner:
. Attribute names are shown in bold. For example: ;CV.
. Menu commands appear with a “>” symbol between levels. For example: File>Open.
. Italics indicate a section of this manual or another publication.
. The following formats are used to highlight important information:

NOTE
Notes indicate important information and appear
in boxes with this format separated from the
running text.

CAUTION
Cautions indicate information that may prevent
serious system or user problems and appear in
boxes with this format separated from the
running text.

WARNING
Warnings indicate information that may prevent
personal injury or equipment damage and
appear in boxes with this format separated from
the running text.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) v

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

vi SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 What Is the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f)? ..................................................................... 1-3

1.1.1 Features of the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) Controllers ................................. 1-3
1.2 Inputs/Outputs ............................................................................................. 1-5
1.2.1 Universal Inputs (UI) ...................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2 Outputs .......................................................................................... 1-6
1.3 Components and Features .......................................................................... 1-9
1.3.1 Motor Management Technology (MMT)......................................... 1-9
1.3.2 Integration With SBC-STATs ......................................................... 1-9
1.3.3 Networking ................................................................................... 1-10
1.3.4 Flow Sensor ................................................................................. 1-11
1.4 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) Controllers ...................................................................... 1-12
1.4.1 The SBC-VAVra........................................................................... 1-12
1.4.2 The SBC-VAVrf............................................................................ 1-12
1.4.3 The SBC-VAVta (-IAQ) ................................................................ 1-13
1.4.4 The SBC-VAVtf (-IAQ) ................................................................. 1-13
1.5 Specifications............................................................................................. 1-15
1.5.1 Networking ................................................................................... 1-15
1.5.2 Integrated Components ............................................................... 1-15
1.5.3 Actuator Motor ............................................................................. 1-15
1.5.4 Terminations ................................................................................ 1-15
1.5.5 Input Supply ................................................................................. 1-15
1.5.6 Operating Environment ................................................................ 1-15
1.5.7 Dimensions .................................................................................. 1-15
1.5.8 Agency Approvals ........................................................................ 1-15
2.1 Installation.................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2 Changing the Actuator Orientation .............................................................. 2-4
2.3 Mounting ...................................................................................................... 2-8
2.4 Connecting the Airflow Sensor .................................................................. 2-10
2.5 Wiring Requirements ................................................................................. 2-13
2.5.1 Power Wiring................................................................................ 2-13
2.5.2 EIA-485 Communications Wiring ................................................. 2-15
2.5.3 Input & Output Wiring................................................................... 2-16
2.5.4 Optional Actuator Wiring .............................................................. 2-23
3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2 System......................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 About.............................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Diagnostics .................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.3 Power Up ....................................................................................... 3-5
3.3 Schedules .................................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.1 Clock/Calendar ............................................................................ 3-10
3.3.2 Summary...................................................................................... 3-11
3.3.3 Schedules 1 Through 6................................................................ 3-13
3.4 Temperature (Analog Inputs)..................................................................... 3-17
3.4.1 Thermostat................................................................................... 3-17
3.4.2 Setpoint Adjust............................................................................. 3-18

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.4.3 Override ...................................................................................... 3-18

3.4.4 Cooling Setpoints ........................................................................ 3-19
3.4.5 Heating Setpoints........................................................................ 3-20
3.4.6 Alarms ......................................................................................... 3-22
3.4.7 Supply ......................................................................................... 3-25
3.4.8 Sensor Bus.................................................................................. 3-26
3.5 Flow .......................................................................................................... 3-32
3.5.1 Control........................................................................................ 3-32
3.5.2 Cooling ........................................................................................ 3-33
3.5.3 Heating........................................................................................ 3-36
3.5.4 Unoccupied ................................................................................. 3-36
3.5.5 Warm-Up..................................................................................... 3-36
3.5.6 Indoor Air Quality ........................................................................ 3-37
3.5.7 Damper ....................................................................................... 3-37
3.5.8 Alarms ......................................................................................... 3-38
3.5.9 Proof of Flow ............................................................................... 3-39
3.6 Auxiliary .................................................................................................... 3-45
3.6.1 Fan .............................................................................................. 3-45
3.6.2 Electric Reheat............................................................................ 3-46
3.6.3 Valve Control............................................................................... 3-47
3.6.4 PID Control.................................................................................. 3-50
3.6.5 Occupancy Detector.................................................................... 3-60
3.6.6 Relative Humidity ........................................................................ 3-60
3.7 I/O Setup................................................................................................... 3-66
3.7.1 Universal Inputs (UI1, UI2 and UI3) ............................................ 3-66
3.7.2 Analog Output (AO1)................................................................... 3-72
3.7.3 Relay Outputs ............................................................................. 3-75
3.8 Networking ................................................................................................ 3-80
3.8.1 Configuration............................................................................... 3-80
3.8.2 Schedule Broadcast .................................................................... 3-81
4.1 Scheduling .................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.1 Inactive Schedule State ................................................................ 4-4
4.1.2 All-day Override ............................................................................ 4-4
4.1.3 Schedule Broadcast ...................................................................... 4-5
4.1.4 Power-up State ............................................................................. 4-5
4.1.5 Host Override ................................................................................ 4-7
4.1.6 Zone Scheduling ........................................................................... 4-7
4.1.7 Occupancy Detection .................................................................... 4-7
4.1.8 User Override................................................................................ 4-9
4.2 Setting the Temperature and Flow Setpoints............................................ 4-11
4.3 SBC-VAV Control Modes.......................................................................... 4-16
4.3.1 Constant Air Volume (CAV) ........................................................ 4-16
4.3.2 Supply Dependant (VST) ............................................................ 4-16
4.3.3 Heating Only ............................................................................... 4-18
4.3.4 Cooling Only................................................................................ 4-21

viii SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.3.5 Cooling with Reheat..................................................................... 4-23

4.4 Auxiliary Functions..................................................................................... 4-25
4.4.1 Series Fan.................................................................................... 4-25
4.4.2 Parallel Fan.................................................................................. 4-25
4.4.3 Induction Damper......................................................................... 4-25
4.4.4 Valve Control ............................................................................... 4-26
4.5 Digital Outputs ........................................................................................... 4-29
4.6 Dual Duct Applications............................................................................... 4-30
4.7 Tracking ..................................................................................................... 4-31
4.8 Indoor Air Quality ....................................................................................... 4-32
5.1 Temperature Display ................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Setpoint Adjustment Display........................................................................ 5-4
5.2.1 SBC-STAT2 ................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 SBC-STAT2-D ............................................................................... 5-4
5.2.3 SBC-STAT3 ................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 Calculated Setpoint Display......................................................................... 5-5
5.4 LED.............................................................................................................. 5-6
5.5 Override Mode ............................................................................................. 5-7
5.6 Menu Actions ............................................................................................... 5-8
5.6.1 Enable/Disable Values................................................................... 5-8
5.6.2 Setting Values................................................................................ 5-8
5.7 SBC-STAT3 Menus ..................................................................................... 5-9
5.7.1 User Menu ..................................................................................... 5-9
5.7.2 Install Menu.................................................................................. 5-10
5.7.3 Balance Menu .............................................................................. 5-13
5.7.4 Service Menu ............................................................................... 5-17
System Channel, FF00 .................................................................................... A-3
DAT Channel, FE08......................................................................................... A-5
UI3 Channel, FE03 .......................................................................................... A-6
UI2 Channel, FE02 .......................................................................................... A-8
UI1 Channel, FE01 ........................................................................................ A-10
Temperature Channel, FE00 ......................................................................... A-12
AO Channel, FD01 ........................................................................................ A-17
Proof of Flow Channel, FC02 ........................................................................ A-18
Occupancy Detection Channel, FC01 ........................................................... A-19
Digital Output Channel, FB01-FB05 .............................................................. A-20
Fan Channel, FB01........................................................................................ A-21
PID Channel, FA11........................................................................................ A-22
Valve Control 2 Channel, FA09 ..................................................................... A-24
Valve Control 1 Channel, FA08 ..................................................................... A-26
Flow Alarm Channel, FA05............................................................................ A-28
Electric Reheat Channel, FA03 ..................................................................... A-29
Flow Setpoints Channel, FA01 ...................................................................... A-30
Indoor Air Quality, FA01 ................................................................................ A-31
Flow Channel, FA00 ...................................................................................... A-32

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Schedules Channels, F901-F906 ................................................................. A-34

Schedules Channel, F900.............................................................................. A-35
Network Channel, F005 ................................................................................. A-37
Appendix B: Pup Data Types........................................................................... B-1

x SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

 SECTION 1: OVERVIEW
This document provides general information regarding the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) model unitary
controllers. General configuration and application information is provided in this document;
however, the various SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers can be used in a wide variety of applications.

IN THIS SECTION
What Is the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f)? .................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Features of the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) Controllers....................................................................................................... 1-3
Inputs/Outputs.......................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
Universal Inputs (UI) ........................................................................................................................................... 1-5
Outputs................................................................................................................................................................ 1-6
Components and Features....................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Motor Management Technology (MMT) .............................................................................................................. 1-9
Integration With SBC-STATs ............................................................................................................................... 1-9
Networking ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-10
Flow Sensor .......................................................................................................................................................1-11
SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) Controllers................................................................................................................................... 1-12
The SBC-VAVra................................................................................................................................................. 1-12
The SBC-VAVrf.................................................................................................................................................. 1-12
The SBC-VAVta (-IAQ) ...................................................................................................................................... 1-13
The SBC-VAVtf (-IAQ) ....................................................................................................................................... 1-13
Specifications ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-15

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 1-1

 SECTION 1: OVERVIEW

1-2 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 1: OVERVIEW WHAT IS THE SBC-VAV(R/T/A/F)?

1.1 W HAT IS THE SBC-VAV(R/T/A/F)?

The SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) model controllers are variable air volume (VAV) and constant air volume (CAV)
terminal box digital controllers. The SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers (refer to Table 1-1, “SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f)
Models,” on page 3) can be employed in different applications. The SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers work on
existing Public Unitary Protocol (PUP) networks. Through an SBC-STAT Sensor Bus (SSB), the SBC-
VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers communicate with SBC-STAT sensors without the use of an I/O point on the
controller. Sections 1.4.1 through 1.4.4 further describe the four SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) type controllers.

NOTE
The term SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f), does not apply to the
SBC-VAV1-5T (FBK), SBC-VAV2, or SBC-VAV3.

Table 1-1 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) Models

SBC-VAV Analog Universal STAT- Real-time Airflow

Actuator
Controller Triacs Relays Outputs Inputs BUS Clock Sensor

SBC-VAVra None 5 1 2 1 External Option Yes Yes

SBC-VAVrf None 5 1 2 1 External Option Yes Feedback

SBC-VAVta 5 None 1 2 1 External Option Yes Yes

SBC-VAVta-IAQ 5 None 1 3 1 External Option Yes Yes

SBC-VAVtf 5 None 1 2 1 External Option Yes Feedback

SBC-VAVtf-IAQ 5 None 1 3 1 External Option Yes Feedback

1.1.1 FEATURES OF THE SBC-VAV(R/T/A/F) CONTROLLERS

. Optically isolated triac solid-state relay outputs with metal oxide varistors (MOV) (SBC-VAVta and -
VAVtf)
. Mechanical relays equipped with a tranzorb protection device to suppress transients and contact arc-
ing (SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf)
. Analog outputs with 0-10VDC range, 8-bit resolution
. 15-bit resolution universal inputs (UI)
. Easy configuration through tools such as SoloPro for WindowsTM
. Automatic settings for VAV or CAV control mode
. Separate heating and cooling options for supply mode
. Up to 115.2K baud communication rate
. Motor Management TechnologyTM (MMTTM) for monitoring, identifying, and correcting motor shorts
. An integrated Belimo® LM24-10P-M feedback actuator that allows you to monitor the position of the
damper at all times or an integrated Belimo LM24-M actuator
. An on board, solid-state airflow sensor that measures the airflow and enables the calibration of airflow
measurement for a wide range of VAV and CAV terminal box sizes and types

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 1-3

WHAT IS THE SBC-VAV(R/T/A/F)? SECTION 1: OVERVIEW

. SBC-STAT features, including: digital thermostat capability; non-polar SSB wiring; light emitting diode
(LED) display; password protection; easy-to-follow menu selections; a two-wire multiplexed power and
data bus; a common terminal (SSB) for a single SBC-STAT or SBC-RHT; and the capability of having
four digital SBC-STATs on a single controller
. Flash updates through SoloPro for Windows for easy incorporation of the latest firmware
. Real-time clock module (optional) for more accurate, stand alone time keeping

1-4 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 1: OVERVIEW INPUTS/OUTPUTS

1.2 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
1.2.1 UNIVERSAL INPUTS (UI)

The Universal (analog) Inputs at Terminal Block 1 are high resolution (15-bit) UIs that can accept 0-20mA
(DC) when in current mode, 0-1M inputs when in resistance mode, or 0-10VDC when in voltage mode. A
capacitor in the circuit provides a 10Hz low-pass filter. Overrange protection is provided to clamp normal
overrange conditions and to protect against damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD). Input modes are
selected by positioning a jumper on the current, voltage, and resistance (IVR) pin-terminal block located
adjacent to TB1 (refer to Figure 1-1). When the I and V pins are jumpered together, the UI is in current
mode. When the R and V pins are jumpered together, the UI is in resistance mode. Use resistance mode
for dry contact digital inputs. If there is no jumper, the UI is in voltage mode. The UIs can be configured for
alarming, setup/setback, filtering, and input polarity. UIs can be used as a universal input, as the proof of
flow input, as a motion detection input, or as the duct temperature input.

. When a UI is in current mode, a jumper connects a 249, ±1% resistor between the UI terminal and
ground (COM). A 20mA current into the input will develop 4.98VDC at the UI terminal. The sensed
voltage is then converted to 4-20mA. Configuration tool settings should not be confused with the 0-
20mA physical input range.
. When a UI is in resistance mode, a jumper connects a 10K, ±1% pull-up resistor between the UI ter-
minal and +5VREF. When in Resistance Mode, the attribute FE0x;ST for the UI should be set to
Thermistor. Multi-point calibration curve capability is available using SoloPro for Windows.
. In voltage mode, the UI has a DC input impedance of 200K, ±1%. When in voltage mode, the UI nor-
mal physical input range is 0-10VDC. Through SoloPro for Windows, you can customize the input
range by selecting minimum and maximum values between 0 and 10 at attributes FE01;MN and MX. It
is also possible to set the zero and span points for 0-100% range results. These settings should not be
confused with the 0-10VDC physical input range.

IVR Pin Terminal

Block

TB1

Figure 1-1: The IVR Pin Terminal Block Located Above TB1

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 1-5

INPUTS/OUTPUTS SECTION 1: OVERVIEW

1.2.2 OUTPUTS
1.2.2.1 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Digital Outputs (DOs) provide ON/OFF control of output devices such as fans, valves, or cooling or reheat
stages. There are two types of DOs: optically-isolated triac solid-state (triacs) and mechanical relay
(relays). Relays and triacs have identical logical operation. However, they have different physical operating
conditions. All DOs enforce minimum cycle time operation, determine the polarity (ON/OFF), and provide a
runtime alarm limit for the output. Through SoloPro for Windows, you can define normal, inverted, always
on, or always off operating modes for the DOs.

Relays have a 1A, 24VAC/DC rated load, normally open, non-polar contact. A tranzorb protection device is
provided to suppress transients and contact arcing. At the rated load, the relays have an operating lifetime
of greater than one (1) million operations. Pulse width modulation (PWM) operation of floating valves, etc.,
is not recommended with relays.

Triacs have a 1A, 24VAC rated load, normally open, non-polar contact. An MOV protection device is
provided to suppress transients. Triacs are recommended for PWM operation of floating valves, damper
motors, etc. Triacs will switch a 1A, 24VDC load, but they will not turn off until the load power is removed.

CAUTION
Triacs will switch a 1A, 24VDC load, but they
will not turn off until the load power is
removed.

NOTE
AAM recommends that output loads be
wired so that one side of the load is
grounded when possible.

The SBC-VAVta and SBC-VAVtf controllers have five (5) triac outputs at TB3 terminals 11 through 20. The
triac outputs are suitable for driving pilot duty relays, PWM valve actuators, and floating setpoint valve
actuators. Each triac output is capable of tracking the amount of time that the output is considered to be
engaged (runtime hours).

The first DO (marked K1 on the PCB) is the Fan Digital Output. It is dedicated for the use of series fan,
parallel fan, or induction damper binary control.

The second DO (marked K2 on the PCB) can: control one stage of reheat; function as the decrease
position signal when driving a valve; or function as the PWM output when PWM is used for chill/hot water
valve positioning.

The third DO (marked K3 on the PCB) can control one stage of reheat or can serve as the increase
position signal when driving a valve.

The fourth DO (marked K4 on the PCB) can control one stage of reheat or function as the decrease
position signal for motor control.

1-6 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 1: OVERVIEW INPUTS/OUTPUTS

The fifth DO (marked K5 on the PCB) can control one stage of reheat or function as the increase position
signal for motor control. (SBC-VAVra and SBC-VAVrf only.)

1.2.2.2 ANALOG OUTPUTS

You can control analog outputs (AO) automatically, manually, or by a program over the EIA-485
communications network. When set to automatic control, the output is dedicated to the analog control
proportional+integral+derivative (PID) loop. Modulation of reheat valves, radiation valves, or lighting
ballasts is a suitable application for the AO, which has 0–10VDC and 8-bit resolution.

Table 1-2 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) Input and Output Assignments

Terminal I/O Description

1 (TB5) SSB SSB Signal

2 (TB5) COM SSB Common

3 (TB5) AO1 Analog Output Channel 1

4 (TB5) COM Analog Output Common

Relay 1 Common - (SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf controller

types only) or,
11 (TB3) K1
Triac Output 1 - (SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf controller types
only)

Relay 1 Normally Open - (SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf

controller types only) or,
12 (TB3) K1
Triac Output 1 - (SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf controller types
only)

Relay 2 Common - (SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf controller

types only) or,
13 (TB3) K2
Triac Output 2 - (SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf controller types
only)

Relay 2 Normally Open - (SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf

controller types only) or,
14 (TB3) K2
Triac Output 2 - (SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf controller types
only)

Relay 3 Common - (SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf controller

types only) or,
15 (TB3) K3
Triac Output 3 - (SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf controller types
only)

Relay 3 Normally Open - (SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf

controller types only) or,
16 (TB3) K3
Triac Output 3 - (SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf controller types
only)

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 1-7

INPUTS/OUTPUTS SECTION 1: OVERVIEW

Table 1-2 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) Input and Output Assignments

Terminal I/O Description

Relay 4 Common - (SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf controller

types only) or,
17 (TB3) K4
Triac Output 4 - (SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf controller types
only)

Relay 4 Normally Open - (SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf

controller types only) or,
18 (TB3) K4
Triac Output4 - (SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf controller types
only)

Relay 5 Common - (SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf controller

types only) or,
19 (TB3) K5
Triac Output 5 - (SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf controller types
only)

Relay 5 Normally Open - (SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf

controller types only) or,
20 (TB3) K5
Triac Output5 - (SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf controller types
only)

21 (TB4) AC Line 24 Volt AC Control Power Input

22 (TB4) AC AUX 24 Volt AC Auxiliary Output for DC Loads (5A Fuse)

23 (TB4) AC RET 24 Volt AC Neutral

24 (TB2) N+ Positive 485 Network Communication Line

25 (TB2) N- Negative 485 Network Communication Line

30 (TB1) UI3 Universal Input 3 (IAQ Models Only)

31 (TB1) COM Common (IAQ Models Only)

32 (TB1) UI2 Universal Input 2

33 (TB1) COM Common

34 (TB1) UI1 Universal Input 1

35 (TB1) COM Common

1-8 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 1: OVERVIEW COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

1.3 COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

1.3.1 MOTOR MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGY (MMT)
MMT extends the functions of the Belimo LM24-M (supplied with the SBC-VAVra and -VAVta) and the
LM24-10P-M (supplied with the SBC-VAVrf and SBC -VAVtf controllers only) actuators via:
. Alarm generation upon actuator disconnect, reconnect, or failure;
. Motor short detection and correction;
. End of travel detection; and
. Motor usage monitoring for energy conservation.

The MMT circuit measures both the motor current and voltage to detect normal, overload, stall, and
shorted conditions. In case of commutator or brush shorts, the MMT circuit provides a clearing pulse to
remove small amounts of debris. Through the MMT circuit, you can monitor the position of a potentiometer
on feedback actuators.

NOTE
MMT functions only on SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f)
controllers connected to Belimo LM24-M
and LM24-10P-M model actuators.

NOTE
The Siemens GDE131.1U and the Neptronic
BBT 24 have been tested and approved by
AAM; however, most industry actuators are
compatible with the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) family
of controllers.

1.3.2 INTEGRATION W ITH SBC-STATS

Terminal Block 5/SSB (TB5:SSB) is a non-polar, two wire, bidirectional sensor bus that can be used in
either digital or analog mode. In analog mode, it supports the SBC-STAT1 and SBC-STAT2 . In digital
TM TM

mode, it can communicate with multiple SSB digital devices such as the SBC-STAT3 , SBC-STAT1D ,
TM TM

and SBC-STAT2d . Mode switching is automatic and any SSB digital device will override any analog
TM

device.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 1-9

COMPONENTS AND FEATURES SECTION 1: OVERVIEW

Figure 1-2: SBC-STAT3 (left), SBC-STAT1 and SBC-STAT1-D (center), SBC-STAT2 and SBC-STAT2-D
(right)

Through the SBC-STAT Bus (SSB), the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers can communicate with SBC-STAT
thermostats without the use of an I/O point on the controller. The SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers can support
one (1) SBC-STAT1, one (1) SBC-STAT2, or up to four (4) digital SBC-STATs through the SSB.

The SSB can be used to link two or more SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers for certain applications. When using
the SSB to link SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers, one controller must be configured as a master, and all other
controllers must be configured as a slave. In addition, proper polarity must be maintained. Connect SSB
to SSB and COM to COM (connect terminal 1 of TB5 on controller A to terminal 1 of TB5 on controller B;
and connect terminal 2 of TB5 on controller A to terminal 2 of TB5 on controller B). Refer to Section 2,
Wiring and Installation, for additional information.

CAUTION
When using the SSB to link two SBC-VAV(r/
t/a/f) controllers (as needed for certain
applications), polarity must be maintained.
Connect SSB of controller A to SSB of
controller B and COM of controller A to COM
of Controller B.

1.3.3 NETWORKING
Through SoloPro for Windows, you can program the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers and monitor/modify their
setpoints. This configuration tool also allows you to use the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) flash memory capabilities for
uploading and downloading software updates tracked by Software Release Codes. (For more information,
refer to the SoloPro for Windows User Manual.)

1-10 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 1: OVERVIEW COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

Networking is also possible using the Auto-Pilot software through the SAGE
TM
or SF1 area controllers.
MAX TM TM

Auto-Pilot enables you to detect alarms, generate trends, and view color graphical displays of your system
with live data.

Integration of the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f)) controllers into an AAM system occurs through direct connection to the
SAGE or SF1, or to other unitary controllers. Networking of up to 128 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers is
MAX

possible through a single SAGE port.

MAX

1.3.4 FLOW SENSOR

The SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) on board, solid-state airflow sensor measures the airflow through the terminal box.
Airflow measurement and calibration for maximum energy efficiency is possible for a wide range of VAV
and CAV terminal box sizes and types.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 1-11

SBC-VAV(R/T/A/F) CONTROLLERS SECTION 1: OVERVIEW

1.4 SBC-VAV(R/T/A/F) CONTROLLERS

Sections 1.4.1 through 1.4.4 provide a brief description of each of the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers.

1.4.1 THE SBC-VAVRA

The SBC-VAVra has five (5) digital relay outputs, one (1) AO, and two (2) UIs. The SBC-VAVra also
includes an integrated Belimo LM24-M actuator that employs MMT to monitor, identify, and correct motor
shorts. The position of the controller’s integrated damper motor is controlled by the SBC-VAVra’s
proportional+integral (PI) control loop.

Figure 1-3: The SBC-VAVra and SBC-VAVrf (feedback actuator)

1.4.2 THE SBC-VAVrf

The SBC-VAVrf is equipped with five (5) digital relay outputs, one (1) AO, and two (2) UIs. The SBC-VAVrf
is also equipped with a Belimo LM24-10P-M feedback actuator, which enables you to monitor the damper
position at all times. The position of the controller’s integrated damper motor is controlled by the SBC-
VAVrf’s PI control loop.

1-12 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 1: OVERVIEW SBC-VAV(R/T/A/F) CONTROLLERS

1.4.3 THE SBC-VAVta (-IAQ)

The SBC-VAVta is equipped with five (5) triac solid-state relay outputs, one (1) AO, and two (2) UIs. The
SBC-VAVta also includes an integrated Belimo actuator that employs MMT to monitor, identify, and correct
motor shorts. The position of the controller’s integrated damper motor is controlled by the SBC-VAVta’s PI
control loop.

SBC-VAVta-IAQ based controllers will include an additional Universal Input (total of three (3) UIs), which is
used exclusively for CO readings for the Indoor Air Quality application.
2

Figure 1-4: The SBC-VAVta (actuator) and SBC-VAVtf (feedback actuator)

1.4.4 THE SBC-VAVtf (-IAQ)

The SBC-VAVtf is equipped with five (5) triac solid-state relay outputs, one (1) AO, and two (2) UIs. The
SBC-VAVtf also includes an integrated Belimo LM24-10P-M feedback actuator that employs MMT to
monitor, identify, and correct motor shorts. The position of the controller’s integrated damper motor is
controlled by the SBC-VAVtf’s PI control loop. The feedback actuator allows you to monitor the position of
the damper at all times.

SBC-VAVtf-IAQ based controllers will include an additional Universal Input (total of three (3) UIs), which is
used exclusively for CO readings for the Indoor Air Quality application.
2

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 1-13

SBC-VAV(R/T/A/F) CONTROLLERS SECTION 1: OVERVIEW

GUI Client GUI Server

Ethernet
Configuration Tool

Ethernet Ethernet

232 Area 232 Area

232 Controller 232 Controller

PUP RS-485

VAV Controller V3T Controller GPC Controller

Figure 1-5: System Architecture of SBC-VAV Products

1-14 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 1: OVERVIEW SPECIFICATIONS

1.5 SPECIFICATIONS
1.5.1 NETWORKING
The following specifications are necessary for networking of the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) controllers:
. line signaling: EIA-485
. wiring: shielded, twisted pair 18-22 AWG
. network protection: dual tranzorbs, Hi ESD driver
. communications speed: 1,200bps–115.2Kbps baud rate, programmable
. network configuration: multidrop to 5,000ft. (1.5km) total
. protocol: PUP.

1.5.2 INTEGRATED COMPONENTS

. LM24-M Belimo actuator (SBC-VAVra and SBC-VAVta) with floating mount, eliminating damper shaft
stress and binding.
. LM24-10P-M Belimo feedback actuator (SBC-VAVrf and SBC-VAVtf) with floating mount, eliminating
damper shaft stress and binding.
. Flow sensor.

1.5.3 ACTUATOR MOTOR

. Torque rating: 35in. lbs. (8Nm minimum).
. Travel time: approximately 85 seconds.

1.5.4 TERMINATIONS
. Pluggable terminal blocks for inputs, outputs, power, and network connection.

1.5.5 INPUT SUPPLY

. NEC class 2 transformer (customer-supplied).
. 24VAC, 50/60Hz, 10VA maximum, 5VA typical.
. 5A fuse load protection.
. PTC control electronics protection.

1.5.6 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

. Temperature range: 0–50C.
. Humidity range: 5–95% RH noncondensing.

1.5.7 DIMENSIONS
. Size: 8.5 in. (21.6 cm) 4.75 in. (14.6 cm) 2.63 in. (6.7 cm) and 5.5 in (16.51 cm)  4.75 in (14.6 cm)
 1.5 in. (3.81 cm)
. Shipping weight: 2.04 lbs (.93 kg) and 1.86 lbs (.84 kg)

1.5.8 AGENCY APPROVALS

. UL listed 916, Management Equipment, Energy (PAZX).
. UL 873 Component-Temperature-Indicating and Regulating Equipment (XAPX2).
. Complies with FCC rules Part 15, Class B Computing Device.
. Complies with CE directives and standards.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 1-15

SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 1: OVERVIEW

1-16 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

 SECTION 2: W IRING AND INSTALLATION
This section covers mounting, connecting the airflow sensor, and wiring the SBC-VAV controllers.
Wiring instructions for power, communications, and inputs/outputs appear along with safety
requirements.

IN THIS SECTION
Installation ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-3
Changing the Actuator Orientation........................................................................................................................... 2-4
Mounting .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-8
Connecting the Airflow Sensor............................................................................................................................... 2-10
Wiring Requirements.............................................................................................................................................. 2-13
Power Wiring..................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
EIA-485 Communications Wiring ...................................................................................................................... 2-15
Input & Output Wiring........................................................................................................................................ 2-16
Optional Actuator Wiring ................................................................................................................................... 2-23

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 2-1

 SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION

2-2 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

2.1 INSTALLATION
The installation of the SBC-VAV model controllers involves mounting, supplying power, connecting to the
communications network, and connecting input and output devices. All wiring connections to the SBC-VAV
are made with the use of terminal blocks (TB). The TBs are plug (female) & socket (male) style. The plug
consists of terminal ports and adjustment screws. Input/output device, network, and power wires enter the
terminal ports and are secured to the assembly with the adjustment screws. The socket consists of a row
of pins and is permanently mounted to the printed circuit board (PCB). When connecting/disconnecting the
two parts of the TB, align the holes on the plug with the pins on the socket and avoid twisting, thus
damaging the assembly. Such damage will void the product warranty.

WARNING
The sockets to which the terminal block plugs
connect are permanently attached to the PCB.
Twisting or applying torque when connecting/
disconnecting will result in damage that will void
the product warranty.

WARNING
SBC-VAV controllers should only be used in a
manner specified by the manufacturer.

WARNING
Only trained personnel should service SBC-VAV
type controllers. No operator replaceable parts
exist in SBC-VAV type controllers.

WARNING
Remove power before servicing.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 2-3

CHANGING THE ACTUATOR ORIENTATION SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION

2.2 CHANGING THE ACTUATOR ORIENTATION

Depending on the specifics of a particular job, it may be advantageous to have the actuator mounted to the
left or right of the controller. This may be due to the mounting site, the direction of wiring, etc. The SBC-
VAV(r/t/a/f) allows you to reverse the orientation of the actuator by changing the mounting clip. The metal
work consists of two pieces, the baseplate and the mounting clip, shown in Figure 2-1. The mounting clip
is removable and can be reversed to provide mounting options with the actuator on the left or right side.

Baseplate

Mounting Clip
Figure 2-1 NB-VAV Metalwork

Before reversing the orientation of the actuator mounting clip, you must remove the actuator by unplugging
the signal cable connecting the actuator to the controller and removing the screws from the reverse side of
the controller which hold the actuator.

2-4 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION CHANGING THE ACTUATOR ORIENTATION

To reverse the orientation of the actuator mounting clip, you must perform the following steps:

1. Press on the locking tab to release the mounting clip. While maintaining pressure on the tab, slide the
mounting clip to the end of the slots.

Figure 2-2 Unlock Actuator Mounting Clip

2. Remove the mounting clip from the baseplate.

Figure 2-3 Remove Actuator Mounting Clip

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 2-5

CHANGING THE ACTUATOR ORIENTATION SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION

3. Rotate the mounting clip.

Figure 2-4 Rotate Mounting Clip

4. Insert the mounting clip into the other set of slots.

Figure 2-5 Insert Mounting Clip in Slots

2-6 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION CHANGING THE ACTUATOR ORIENTATION

5. Slide the mounting clip towards the edge of the baseplate until the locking tab clicks into place.

Figure 2-6 Slide Clip Into Place

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 2-7

MOUNTING SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION

2.3 MOUNTING
Perform the following procedure to mount the SBC-VAV controller.

CAUTION
The mounting area should be free from moisture
and leakage.

1. Loosen the 10mm hex nuts of the U-bolt attached to the damper clamp.
2. Adjust the alignment of the actuator to the mounting bracket so that the screw attaching the two parts
fits snugly into the bottom portion of the diamond shaped hole on the bracket.
3. Place the damper clamp around the damper shaft and position the SBC-VAV controller on the terminal
box so that at least two (2) of the controller backing’s mounting holes are on the terminal box. Make
sure that the bottom of the actuator is flush with the bottom of the sheet metal plate behind it.

CAUTION
The metal of the SBC-VAV mounting bracket
must make contact with the metal of the
terminal box and the terminal box must be
grounded to a true earth ground. Otherwise,
electrical and communications problems are
likely to occur.

4. Hand tighten the 10mm hex nuts to temporarily secure the damper clamp to the damper shaft.

NOTE
AAM recommends the use of self-drilling
mounting screws for securing the controller
to the terminal box. Mounting screws used
to secure the controller to the terminal box
are not supplied with the SBC-VAV
controllers.

5. If you are not using self-drilling mounting screws, use the controller backing as a template and mark
the mounting hole locations on the terminal box. Remove the controller, then drill pilot holes in the ter-
minal box. AAM recommends that at least two (2) screws be used to secure the SBC-VAV controller to
the terminal box.
6. Align the mounting holes of the SBC-VAV controller with the pilot holes drilled in Step 5 and secure the
controller to the terminal box using mounting screws. Mounting screws used to secure the controller to
the terminal box are not supplied with the SBC-VAV controllers.
7. Set the damper and actuator to 50 percent and fully tighten the damper clamp’s 10mm hex nuts.
8. Adjust the hard stops of the damper clamp by loosening the screws that appear on top of the stops.
Move the stops to the desired positions, and tighten the associated screws.

2-8 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION MOUNTING

10mm Hex Nuts Mounting Holes Airflow Sensor

Damper Clamp

Mounting Hole

Damper Clamp
Screws

Mounting Hole

Clutch Release

Figure 2-7: SBC-VAV Controller

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 2-9

CONNECTING THE AIRFLOW SENSOR SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION

2.4 CONNECTING THE AIRFLOW SENSOR

The SBC-VAV’s integral airflow sensor is a precision instrument. To prevent dust particles from entering
the SBC-VAV’s flow sensor, a sealed in-line filter is provided. Place the filter between the input (high)
pressure side of the sensor and the high pressure side of the airflow pickup. When installing an SBC-VAV
type controller, connect the low pressure side of the duct airflow pitot to the low pressure side of the airflow
sensor and the high pressure side of the duct airflow pitot to the high pressure side of the airflow sensor.
Do not twist the sensor at any time.

CAUTION
Twisting or applying torque to the airflow
sensor will damage the internal components
of the device. Once damaged, the device
will either not work at all or will produce
inaccurate measurements. If it is determined
that application caused the damage, the
warranty will become void.

Figure 2-8: Airflow Sensor Filter

2-10 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION CONNECTING THE AIRFLOW SENSOR

Figure 2-9: The SBC-VAVra, SBC-VAVrf (actuator not shown)

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 2-11

CONNECTING THE AIRFLOW SENSOR SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION

Figure 2-10:SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf

2-12 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION WIRING REQUIREMENTS

2.5 W IRING REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION
Wiring for the SBC-VAVra, SBC-VAVrf, SBC-
VAVta, and SBC-VAVtf, differs greatly from
the previous versions of the SBC-VAV
controllers (the SBC-VAV1 and SBC-VAV2).
Do not use wiring instructions provided in
this manual when wiring SBC-VAV1 or SBC-
VAV2 type controllers.

WARNING
Remove power when performing the
following wiring procedures for the SBC-
VAV.

Follow the recommended wiring guidelines to reduce the chance of operation and communication errors. If
you do not use proper wiring techniques, your site may not meet Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) Class A regulations for radio frequency interference (RFI) emissions. All EIA-485 communications
networks should employ shielded, twisted pair wiring. Each twisted pair must be individually shielded.
Unshielded cables must be placed in solid metal conduit alone. Communications wiring (as well as SBC-
STAT and other input wiring) should not be routed together with—or close to—other wiring carrying DC
switching, AC lines, fluorescent lighting or any other RFI/electromagnetic interference (EMI)-emitting
source. Failure to use these types of conductors may result in various system communications problems
such as excessive network retries, noise susceptibility, and loss of communication.

2.5.1 POWER W IRING

You must use a 24VAC 50/60Hz NEC class II transformer rated at 10VA maximum (5VA typical) for power
supply to the SBC-VAV type controllers. Figure 2-5 shows how to wire the SBC-VAV for power. AAM
recommends that 18AWG wiring be used, but the terminals can accommodate 14–22AWG.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 2-13

WIRING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION

TB4:Line 24 VAC

line power
terminal 21

TB4:NEUT
terminal 23 24 VAC return
NEC Class II Transformer

internal connection of AC neutral to frame

Figure 2-11: Wiring 24VAC Power

NOTE
AAM recommends that each SBC-VAV on a
network has an individual power
transformer.

CAUTION
AAM does not recommend that you share
power transformers among unitary
controllers. If this technique is used against
the recommendations of AAM, AC polarity
must be maintained throughout the power
network. Damage will result if two or more
network devices sharing the same AC
supply do not have their power correctly
polarized. Such damage voids the product
warranty.

CAUTION
All power transformers used must be rated
to power all devices connected to them.

2-14 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION WIRING REQUIREMENTS

2.5.2 EIA-485 COMMUNICATIONS W IRING

Figure 2-6 illustrates the EIA-485 communications network wiring for the SBC-VAV. For cases in which 14–
22AWG, individually shielded, twisted pair wiring is recommended for optimal operations, EIA-485 (RS-
485) wiring standards apply.

JP6 is an RS-485 termination resistor of 250 ohms. Set the jumper on JP6 of the last device on the
network for termination of all EIA-485 networks.

PUP network wiring from the

previous device

TB2:N-
terminal 25
PUP network wiring
TB2:N+ to the next device
terminal 24

Figure 2-12: Multidrop EIA-485 Wiring

Networked Device Networked Device Networked Device

The last shield
SBC-VAV
should be tied back
Enclosure and free from any
connection
Enclosure is grounded to
earth.

shield
shield
shield
enclosure

enclosure
conduit enclosure
conduit
conduit

Shield can be grounded to a On last device set the jumper on

terminal box enclosure. JP6 for termination of all EIA-485
networks.

Figure 2-13: Proper Shield Wiring of Networked Devices

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 2-15

WIRING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION

2.5.3 INPUT & OUTPUT W IRING

The most common wiring applications for the SBC-VAV type controllers appear in subsections 2.5.3.1
through 2.5.3.6. You should discuss deviations from the following examples with AAM Technical Support
before making modifications to controllers. Any modifications other than those supported by AAM may
void the product warranty.

The Universal Inputs (UI) can be used as voltage, current, and resistance inputs. Input modes are selected
by positioning a jumper on the current, voltage, and resistance (IVR) pin-terminal block located adjacent to
TB1. Overrange protection is provided to clamp normal overrange conditions and to protect against
damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD). When the I and V pins are jumpered together, the UI is in
current mode. When the R and V pins are jumpered together, the UI is in resistance mode. If there is no
jumper, the UI is in voltage mode. The UIs can be configured for alarming, setup/setback, filtering, and
input polarity. UIs can be used as a universal input, as the SBC-VAV proof of flow input, as a motion
detection input, or as the duct temperature input. Refer to Section 1, Overview, for additional information.

IVR Pin-terminal
Block

TB1

Figure 2-14 IVR Pin-Terminal Block

2.5.3.1 UNIVERSAL INPUT AS VOLTAGE INPUT

When the UI is used as a 0–10VDC analog input, do not jumper the pins on the IVR pin-terminal block. For
example, if UI1 is to be used as a 0–10VDC analog input, then UI1 is in voltage mode and therefore, the
jumper on the UI1 row of the IVR pin-terminal block should be removed.

2-16 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION WIRING REQUIREMENTS

Terminal

Terminal 34

+ -
Voltage Device

Power Supply

Figure 2-15: 0–5VDC Device Used on UI

2.5.3.2 UNIVERSAL INPUT AS 4–20MA INPUT

When using the UI as a 4–20mA input, the I and V pins on the IVR pin-terminal block must be jumpered
together. For example, if UI1 is to be used as a 4–20mA input, then the UI is in current mode and
therefore, the I and V pins on the UI1 row on the pin-terminal block should be jumpered together.

Terminal

Terminal 34

RET
Power Supply
+VDC

-
Current Transmitter +

Figure 2-16: 4–20mA Device Used on UI

2.5.3.3 UNIVERSAL INPUT AS DIGITAL INPUT OR T HERMISTOR

The UI can also be configured as a thermistor or digital input device using a dry contact. In this
configuration, the V and R pins on the IVR pin-terminal block must be jumpered together.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 2-17

WIRING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION

Terminal

Terminal 34

Figure 2-17: Dry Contact as Digital Input Using UI

2.5.3.4 SBC-STAT/THERMISTOR W IRING

Figure 2-12 illustrates wiring of the SBC-STAT Communications Bus (STAT Bus) on the SBC-STAT3 to the
SBC-VAV through the SSB and COM terminals on TB1. This terminal correlates to the SSB/COM
terminals of the SBC-STAT3 as shown.

200' Total Twisted Pair Wire

The last shield should be tied back
and free from any connection TB5
SSB
shield COM
Wiring to the
shield
next device shield AO1
COM

SBC Controller

SSB/ SSB/ SSB/ SSB/

COM COM COM COM

SBC -STAT3 SBC -STAT3

Figure 2-18: SBC-STAT Bus Wiring of SBC-STAT3 to SBC-VAV

2-18 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION WIRING REQUIREMENTS

Figure 2-13 illustrates wiring of the SBC-STAT Communications Bus (STAT Bus) on the SBC-STAT2 or
SBC-STAT1 to the SBC-VAV through the SSB and COM terminals on TB1. This terminal correlates to the
SSB/COM terminals of the SBC-STAT2 and SBC-STAT1 as shown.

TB5

SSB
shield
COM
The last shield should be cut and tied
back and free from any connection AO1
shield
COM

SSB/ SSB/
COM COM
SBC-STAT1 or SBC-STAT2
Figure 2-19: SBC-STAT Bus Wiring of SBC-STAT2 or SBC-STAT1 to SBC-VAV

Figure 2-14 illustrates the optional network wiring of the SBC-STAT to the SBC-VAV through the N+ and N-
terminals on TB2.

Wiring to next device

Shielded Twisted Pair Wire
TB2

N-
shield
shield N+
W iring to the
SBC Controller
next device
shield
The shield can be grounded to a
terminal box enclosure at one end
only.

N- N+ Red N- N+ Green
Black Yellow

SBC-STAT3 SBC-STAT3
Figure 2-20: SBC-STAT Network Wiring to SBC-VAV

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 2-19

WIRING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION

Using digital thermostats—SBC-STAT1-D, SBC-STAT2-D and SBC-STAT3—two or more SBC-VAVs can

be wired onto the same Sensor Bus. For this wiring structure to work properly, one SBC-VAV must be set
up as a Master (BM=0), and all other SBC-VAVs must be set up as Slaves (BM=1). Remember, the
maximum number of digital SBC-STATs allowed on a Sensor Bus is four.

200' Total Twisted Pair Wire

TB5

SSB
shield
shield COM
AO1
shield
COM
Master SBC Controller

SSB/ SSB/ SSB/ SSB/

COM COM COM COM

SBC-STAT1-D, SBC-STAT2-D or SBC-STAT3

The last shield should be cut and tied back

and free from any connection
TB5

SSB
shield
shield COM
AO1
COM

Slave SBC Controller

SSB/ SSB/ SSB/ SSB/

COM COM COM COM

SBC-STAT1-D, SBC-STAT2-D or SBC-STAT3

Figure 2-21: Multiple SBC-VAVs on a Sensor Bus.

NOTE
When connecting two or more SBC-VAVs to
the same STATbus, polarity must be
maintained at all connections. Make sure to
connect COM to COM and SSB to SSB at
each device

2.5.3.5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

CAUTION
Wiring for the SBC-VAVra, SBC-VAVrf,
SBC-VAVta, and SBC-VAVtf, differs greatly
from the previous versions of the SBC-VAV
controllers (the SBC-VAV1 and SBC-VAV2).
Do not use wiring instructions provided in
this manual when wiring the SBC-VAV1 and
SBC-VAV2.

2-20 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION WIRING REQUIREMENTS

NOTE
AAM recommends that output loads be
wired so that one side of the load is
grounded when possible.

The SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf controllers have five (5) relay outputs at TB3 terminals 11 and 12 (both
marked K1 on the PCB), 13 and 14 (both marked K2 on the PCB), 15 and 16 (both marked K3 on the
PCB), 17 and 18 (both marked K4 on the PCB), and 19 and 20 (both marked K5 on the PCB). When
wiring, connect one of the output load wires to either K2 terminal (if using relay number 2), connect the
remaining output load wire to a power source wire, then connect the other power source wire to the other
K2 terminal on TB3. For additional information about relays, refer to Section 1, Overview.

Terminal 11 K1

Terminal 12 K1

Load* K2

K2

K3

K3

K4

K4
AC/DC Power**
K5

K5

Mechanical
Relays

*AAM recommends that output loads be

wired so that one side of the load is
grounded when possible.

Figure 2-22: Wiring Relays Using 24VAC/DC Pilot Relays for Typical Setup

The SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf controllers have five (5) triac outputs at TB3 terminals 11 and 12 (both marked
K1 on the PCB), 13 and 14 (both marked K2 on the PCB), and 15 and 16 (both marked K3 on the PCB).
Each triac output is capable of tracking the amount of time that the output is considered to be engaged
(runtime hours). Refer to Figure 2-17 for wiring information. For additional information about triacs, refer to
Section 1, Overview.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 2-21

WIRING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION

CAUTION
Triacs will switch a 1A, 24VDC load, but they
will not turn off until the load power is
removed.

24VAC Pilot Relay for Heavy

Current Load (>1A)
Power*
Terminal 11
K1 Solid-state,
Fan Opto-isolated
45V Bipolar
K1 Relay
Terminal 12
Power* Terminal 13 AC Power**
K2 Solid-state,
Reheat 45V Bipolar Opto-isolated
Terminal 14 K2 Relay
Power* AC Power**
Terminal 15
K3 Solid-state,
Reheat 45V Bipolar Opto-isolated
K3 Relay
Terminal 16
AC Power**
K4

K4

*AAM recommends that output loads be wired K5

so that one side of the load is grounded when
possible. K5
TB3

Figure 2-23: Wiring Triacs Using 24VAC Pilot Relays for Typical Setup

2.5.3.6 W IRING THE ANALOG OUTPUT

You can control analog outputs (AO) manually or by a program over the EIA-485 communications network.
When set to automatic control, the output is dedicated to the analog control
proportional+integral+derivative (PID) loop. Modulation of reheat valves, chiller valves, or lighting ballasts
is a suitable application for AOs, which have 0–10VDC and 8-bit resolution.

Pin 3 on TB5 is the AO. Pin 4 is AO common.

2-22 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION WIRING REQUIREMENTS

0–10VDC Terminal 3
+
device*
-
Terminal 4

*MAXIMUM LOAD: 500 @

10VDC

Figure 2-24: SBC-VAV Analog Output Wired for a 0–10VDC Output Device

2.5.4 OPTIONAL ACTUATOR W IRING

Optional actuators can be either AC- or DC-powered. See Figure 2-19 for wiring an AC actuator.

TB3
K1

K1

K2

AC Actuator K2

COM K3

CW K3

K4

K4
CCW
K5

K5

AC IN

AC OUT

NEUT

TB4

Figure 2-25: AC Actuator Wiring

When connecting a DC-powered actuator, connect the actuators wires to pins 4 (Actuator -) and 5
(Actuator +) on the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) J2 connector. See Figure 2-20 for more information.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 2-23

WIRING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 2: WIRING AND INSTALLATION

1. Feedback ground
2. Feedback wiper J2 Connector
3. Feedback +
-

+
4. Actuator - 1 2 3 4 5
5. Actuator +

2 wires connected to pins

4 and 5

connects to a dc actuator

Figure 2-26: DC Actuator Wiring

If connecting a feedback POT to an optional actuator, connect the POT wires to pins 1, 2 and 3 on the
SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) J2 connector. For wiring information, see Figure 2-21.

1. Feedback ground
2. Feedback wiper J2 Connector
3. Feedback +
-
+

4. Actuator -
1 2 3 4 5
5. Actuator +

5 wire connection to pins

1-5

connects to a dc actuator

Figure 2-27: DC Actuator Potentiometer Wiring

2-24 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

 SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES
This section introduces you to the groupings of attributes used to control the parameters of the
SBC-VAV model controllers over the PUP network. Detailed descriptions of all points for the
controller appear here. Information on common usage of the attributes is also included.

IN THIS SECTION
Introduction .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-2
System ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
About................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Diagnostics ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
Power Up ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-5
Schedules ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-9
Clock/Calendar ................................................................................................................................................. 3-10
Summary............................................................................................................................................................3-11
Schedules 1 Through 6 ..................................................................................................................................... 3-13
Temperature (Analog Inputs).................................................................................................................................. 3-17
Thermostat ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-17
Setpoint Adjust .................................................................................................................................................. 3-18
Override ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-18
Cooling Setpoints .............................................................................................................................................. 3-19
Heating Setpoints.............................................................................................................................................. 3-20
Alarms ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-22
Supply ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-25
Sensor Bus ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-26
Flow ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-32
Control .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-32
Cooling .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-33
Unoccupied ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-36
Warm-Up........................................................................................................................................................... 3-36
Indoor Air Quality .............................................................................................................................................. 3-37
Damper ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-37
Alarms ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-38
Proof of Flow ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-39
Auxiliary ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-45
Fan .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-45
Electric Reheat.................................................................................................................................................. 3-46
Valve Control..................................................................................................................................................... 3-47
PID Control ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-50
Occupancy Detector.......................................................................................................................................... 3-60
Relative Humidity .............................................................................................................................................. 3-60
I/O Setup ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-66
Universal Inputs (UI1, UI2 and UI3) .................................................................................................................. 3-66
Analog Output (AO1) ........................................................................................................................................ 3-72
Relay Outputs ................................................................................................................................................... 3-75
Networking ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-80
Configuration..................................................................................................................................................... 3-80
Schedule Broadcast .......................................................................................................................................... 3-81

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-1

INTRODUCTION SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

3.1 INTRODUCTION
Attributes have two-character names that are generally mnemonic, such as “CV” for current value. In
addition, each point has a default attribute. Generally the most important or useful attribute is the default
attribute. For example, analog input has zone temperature—read from the SBC-STAT—as its default
attribute (ZT).

All attributes appear in boldface to facilitate locating descriptions of a particular attribute in the document
text.

For a listing of each attribute along with the associated channel, see Appendix A: PUP Channels and
Attributes.

3-2 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES SYSTEM

3.2 SYSTEM
The following are System attributes:
FF00;EM, SN, CT, VE, FT, SR, CM, UP, IC, RC, WC, CC, OC, ZP, PD, PS, BU, DE, and RS.
FE00;OA, TF, TE, RT, and ET.

3.2.1 ABOUT
Attribute FF00;EM is Engineering Units. It specifies the type of engineering units (U.S./English or Metric) to
be used for temperatures. If EM is set to zero, degrees are specified in Fahrenheit. If EM is set to 1,
degrees are specified in Celsius. A change in this attribute automatically converts setpoints to the
appropriate units. The display mode for digital thermostats also changes but can be set separately. English
(EM = 0) is the default setting.

NOTE
If the value of EM changes, make sure any
attributes set prior to the change are
recalculated and reprogrammed to reflect the
EM type chosen. Then reset the SBC-VAV.
Failure to correct these entries will result in
display and calculating errors.

Attribute FF00;SN is Serial Number. It displays the Serial Number of the SBC-VAV controller. This attribute
is read-only.

Attribute FF00;CT is the Controller Type. This point identifies the type of device. An SBC-VAV is type 102.
This attribute is read-only, and its value is established at the American Auto-Matrix factory. Flash updates
for the SBC-VAV are rejected if CT is not 102.

Attribute FF00;VE is the Firmware Version. It indicates the version number of the active firmware. This
attribute is read-only.

Attribute FF00;FT is Firmware Type. It defines the class of firmware operating system used in this
controller. Only flash updates of matching firmware type will be accepted. Upgrades and conversions to
other classes of firmware will require special handling. Contact American Auto-Matrix for more information.
This attribute is read-only.

Attribute FF00;SR is the Flash Release Code. This point uniquely defines each flash firmware image. You
can access updated firmware images through SoloPro for Windows™. The numerically higher the
firmware image, the more recent it is. We recommend that all controllers be updated periodically to use the
latest available firmware. For instructions see the SoloPro for Windows User Manual. This attribute is read-
only.

Attribute FF00;CM is the Manufacturer of the device. For American Auto-Matrix products, the number is
255. This attribute is read-only. It is useful when host systems are connected to networks with unitary
controllers from different manufacturers. Flash updates are rejected if CM is not 255.

3.2.1.1 STATISTICS
Attribute FE00;OA is Accumulated Extended Occupancy Time. This read/write point shows the total
amount of time that the SBC-VAV has spent in extended occupancy (override during scheduled

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-3

SYSTEM SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

unoccupied periods). You can clear this value by setting OA to 0.

NOTE
For successful use of the Extended
Occupancy Override feature, SE must 0

Attribute FE00;TF is Total Accumulated Flow (cooling duct). It shows the total amount of accumulated
cooling duct flow in cubic feet or liters. This is a measurement of how much air has passed through the
duct since the last time TF was set to zero. For correct calculation of accumulated flow, ET MUST be
enabled and FE08;CV MUST be a reliable duct temperature value. This attribute is read only. However
you can set it to 0 by making RT = 1.

Attribute FE00;TE is Total Accumulated Energy. It shows the total amount of accumulated energy in BTUs
or kilojoules used by the terminal box. The SBC-VAV multiplies the flow (FA00;CA) by the absolute value
of the difference between the duct temperature and zone temperature (ZT - FE08;CV) and a constant to
produce a value that reflects the amount of energy used by the zone. For correct calculation of
accumulated energy, ET MUST be enabled and FE08;CV MUST be a reliable duct temperature value. The
SBC-VAV calculates the value of this attribute once every minute. You can set TE to 0 by making RT = 1.

NOTE
Both TE and TF are useful for keeping track
of supply air and supply air temperature,
which are important in submetering
applications. These attributes are backed up
into EEPROM once per day (at midnight) or
every time that the system backup RAM
value (BU) is manually changed to 1.

Attribute FE00;RT is Reset Totals. When set to 1, this point will establish zero values in the total
accumulated flow (TF) and total accumulated energy (TE) attributes. This attribute returns to 0 when reset
is complete.

Attribute FE00;ET is Enable Totalization. This attribute, when set to 1, calculates totalized flow and
totalized energy. If you enable this point, you MUST make sure that FE08;CV is a duct temperature value.
Energy totalization is invalid in any other circumstance. Therefore unless FE08;CV is a reliable duct
temperature sensor, ET should remain disabled (ET = 0).

3.2.2 DIAGNOSTICS
Attribute FF00;UP is Flash Update Count. This counter increments each time a new flash firmware image
is accepted by the controller.

Attribute FF00;IC is EEPROM Default Count. This counter increments whenever the EEPROM is restored
to factory default settings (see System attribute DE Default Enable).

3-4 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES SYSTEM

Attribute FF00;RC is Power-up Count. This counter increments each time power is applied to the
controller. This counts power outages and noise related resets as well as resets initiated through System
attribute RS.

Attribute FF00;WC is Watchdog Count. This counter increments upon firmware failure but can also be
advanced during the removal of power.

Attribute FF00;CC is Clock Fail Count. This counter increments upon hardware failure but can also be
advanced during the removal of power.

Attribute FF00;OC is Illegal Opcode Count. This counter increments upon firmware failure but can also be
advanced during the removal of power.

Attribute FF00;ZP is MMT Pulse Count. This counter advances when Motor Management Technology
(MMT) takes action to maintain the operation of the actuator. When several counts are tallied over a period
of a few days, the actuator is reaching its end of life. Low level count activity is normal.

3.2.3 POWER UP
Attribute FF00;PD is Power-Up Delay. It determines how long, in seconds (0–255), a SBC-VAV waits
before energizing its outputs after a power loss or soft reset. During this time, all output control and alarm
functions stop after cycling of power or SBC-VAV reset. This attribute defaults to a value of 5. Any setting <
2 seconds will receive a value of 2 seconds.

Attribute FF00;PS is Power-Up State. It determines which schedule state the SBC-VAV uses after a power
loss and before its time is synchronized. The selections are as follows: unoccupied = 0, warm-up = 1,
occupied = 2 and night setback = 3. The default for this attribute is 2.

NOTE
You can also set the time through the
optional Real-time Clock module. Manual
time setting is also possible.

Attribute FF00;BU is Backup RAM Values. It forces the backup of the attributes TF and TE, and the digital
input attribute OA and digital outputs 1-5 RH to EEPROM. The SBC-VAV copies these values to EEPROM
at midnight each day. However you may force a copy at any time by setting BU to 1. The attribute returns
to 0 when the backup is complete. We recommend that you perform a backup any time that a maintenance
power down is planned or any time that the Electric Reheat attribute RO changed. Attributes affected by
BU or the automatic RAM backup feature of the SBC-VAV are as follows:

. the run time values of Digital Output 1 RH through Digital Output 5 RH

. the accumulated extended time attribute value Digital Input OA
. the analog input total accumulated flow value of the analog input TF and the accumulated energy
value of the Analog Input attribute TE
. the staged values (which are invisible to the user) set when RO is modified.

Attribute FF00;DE is Default Enable. This attribute restores configuration settings to factory defaults. To
set the defaults, enter a value of 197 (a value that is unlikely to occur randomly). It may take several

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-5

SYSTEM SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

seconds to complete the reset. Note that this will not alter the unit ID or selected communications baud
rate.

The attribute FF00;RS is Reset of the SBC-VAV. This point allows a host or operator to reset the controller.
You can reset by giving RS a value of 1, after which RS returns to 0 (the default).

Table 3-1 System Attributes

attr description

System:
About
FF00

Engineering Units—specifies which units of measurement to use in

returning temperature values.
EM
0 = English Units
1 = Metric Units

Serial Number—displays the serial number of the SBC-VAV

SN
controller.

Controller Type—(read-only) factory-set controller type identifies the

CT
type of unitary controller. CT for the SBC-VAV is 102.

Firmware Version—(read-only) contains the version number of the

VE
active firmware.

Firmware Type—defines the class of firmware operating system used

FT
in this controller.

Flash Release Code—(read-only) uniquely defines each flash

SR firmware image. The numerically higher the firmware image, the more
recent it is.

Manufacturer—(read-only) is the manufacturer of the device. AAM

CM
devices are 255.

System:
Statistics
FE00

Accumulated Extended Occupancy—displays the amount of time

OA
the SBC-VAV has spent in extended occupancy.

Total Accumulated Flow—(read-only) is a measurement of how

TF much air has passed through the duct since the last time TF was set
to zero. TF is shown in cubic feet or liters.

Total Accumulated Energy—is the total amount of accumulated

TE
energy used by the terminal box. TE is shown in BTUs or kilojoules.

RT Reset Totals—when = 1, sets TF and TE to zero.

3-6 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES SYSTEM

Table 3-1 System Attributes

attr description

Enable Flow/Energy Totalization—calculates totalized flow and

totalized energy when:
ET
ET = 1 and
FE08;CV = a reliable duct temperature.

System:
Diagnostics
FF00

Flash Update Count—increments each time a new flash firmware

UP
image is accepted by the controller.

EEPROM Default Count—increments whenever the EEPROM is

IC
restored to factory default settings.

Power-up Count—increments each time power is applied to the

RC
controller.

Watchdog Count—increments upon firmware failure but can also be

WC
advanced during the removal of power.

Clock Fail Count—increments upon hardware failure but can also be

CC
advanced during the removal of power.

Illegal Opcode Count—increments upon firmware failure but can

OC
also be advance during the removal of power.

MMT Pulse Count—advances when MMT takes action to maintain

ZP the operation of the actuator. The activity on this count should be low.
If it is high, the actuator is reaching the end of its life.

System:
Power-up
FF00

Power-up Delay—determines how long (0-255 seconds) a SBC-VAV

PD waits before energizing its outputs after power loss or soft reset. PD
defaults to 5 seconds.

Power-up State—determines which schedule state to use after a

power loss and before time sync.
0 = unoccupied
PS
1 = warm-up
2 = occupied (default)
3 = night setback

Backup RAM Values—backs up TF, TE, the digital input attribute OA

BU and digital outputs 1-5 RH to EEPROM each day at midnight. To copy
them at any other time, set BU = 1.

Default Enable—restores configuration settings to factory defaults.

DE
Enter 197 to set the defaults.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-7

SYSTEM SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Table 3-1 System Attributes

attr description

Reset the Controller?—allows a host or operator to reset the

RS
controller by setting RS = 1.

3-8 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES SCHEDULES

3.3 SCHEDULES
The following are Schedule attributes:
F900;TM, DT, H0-H9, DA, DH, CV, C1-C6, AS, HE, HO, ZE, and IS.
F90x;CV, WO, OC, UN, NS, AD, and AO.

The SBC-VAV has one Main Schedule that reflects the values of and has an effect on how the other six
schedules operate. The Main Schedule does not directly act as a schedule, but its current value is the
present scheduled operating mode. This schedule provides attributes used to set the warm up options, the
method of control employed when the SBC-VAV is in an inactive schedule state, zone reception of
schedule information over the RS-485 PUP network and host schedule control options. There are four
active schedule states available on the SBC-VAV:
. warm-up mode (main schedule CV = 1)
. occupied mode (main schedule CV = 2)
. unoccupied mode (main schedule CV = 0)
. night setback mode (main schedule CV = 3).

Warm-up is the period of time before occupancy. During this period, the central air handler unit supplies
warm air to the VAV boxes. Warm-up provides special control action to bring the zone temperature to its
desired setpoint for the occupied mode, based on the heating setpoint. The attributes used to define the
warm-up temperature and flow appear in the analog inputs and damper control. Individual schedules
(Schedule 1 through Schedule 6) dictate time controlled warm-up. In time based warm-up, the warm-up
period ends when occupied mode begins.

Occupied mode is the period of time when the zone is occupied by people and the SBC-VAV must
maintain appropriate comfort levels in the zone. The heating and cooling setpoints define a desired zone
temperature range. Occupied mode ends when unoccupied mode time begins.

Unoccupied mode is the period of time when people are not expected to be in the zone and temperature
control is not as strict. During unoccupied mode, the SBC-VAV maintains cooling comfort levels at setup
values and heating comfort levels at setback values. These setup and setback values are used to broaden
the control range between the heating and cooling setpoints in order to provide less stringent control. The
attributes used to define the offsets are located in the analog inputs, but the time of implementation is set in
the individual schedules (Schedule 1 through Schedule 6). Unoccupied mode usually ends when night
setback begins.

Night setback is the period of time during unoccupied mode when the entire building is usually unoccupied
and the air handler may be shut down. The controller provides the option to set up and set back the night
setback control temperature (as does the standard unoccupied mode) and to determine when these
offsets are reached or have exceeded damper control of air flow resumes. As with unoccupied mode, the
attributes used to define the night setback offsets are located in the analog inputs. However the time of
implementation is set in the individual schedules (Schedule 1 through Schedule 6). Figure 3-1 illustrates a
standard time based flow of the SBC-VAV schedule control modes.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-9

SCHEDULES SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

occupied

W O
warmup

unoccupied

N U

night setback

Figure 3-1: Standard Schedule Modes Rotation Example

In a situation in which schedules may overlap, the SBC-VAV will set priorities. The controller checks from
Schedule 1 through Schedule 6 for the schedule with the highest priority mode. Modes take precedence in
the following order:
. occupied (highest priority)
. warm-up
. unoccupied
. night setback (lowest priority).

3.3.1 CLOCK/CALENDAR
The schedules within the SBC-VAV are local. These schedules operate when the time (schedule attribute
TM in HH:MM format) and day of the week (schedule attribute DA) have been synchronized by a PUP
device communicating over the RS-485 network with synchronization capability.

NOTE
You can also set the time through the
optional Real-time Clock module. Manual
time setting is also possible.

Attribute F900;TM is the System Time attribute. It is a read-write attribute that displays the current system
time in HH:MM format. This attribute defaults to an invalid time and must be set for the current system
time.

Attribute F900;DT is the Current Date. This attribute specifies the current date in MM/DD/YY format.

Attribute F900;DA is the day-of-the-week attribute. It displays a read-write, numeric code (0–6) that
corresponds to the current day of the week. The attribute defaults to an invalid code number. Codes for DA
appear in Table 3-2.

3-10 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES SCHEDULES

Table 3-2: Day of the Week Codes

Value of Day of the

DA Week

0 Monday

1 Tuesday

Wednesda
2
y

3 Thursday

4 Friday

5 Saturday

6 Sunday

7 Holiday

Attribute F900;DH is Holiday. It toggles the holiday status for the current day. This point is overridden by
time synchronization.

Attribute F900;H0-H9 is Programmed Holiday. This is a specified date to be considered a holiday. Set the
date to 0/0/YY to ignore.

3.3.2 SUMMARY
Attribute F900;CV is Schedule Status. It displays the current schedule state of the SBC-VAV. The controller
follows a series of prioritized steps to determine the state that CV is in at any given time. This attribute may
be affected by Schedule 1 CV–Schedule 6 CV, the host override (schedule attribute HE, schedule attribute
HO), the thermostat extended occupancy and the occupancy detector. The SBC-VAV repeatedly checks to
establish which is valid. Figure 3-2 shows the order of priority that the SBC-VAV checks to determine CV.
This attribute is a read-only value. The options for this attribute are as follows: unoccupied (third priority) =
0, warm-up (second priority) = 1, occupied (first priority) = 2, and night setback (lowest priority) = 3.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-11

SCHEDULES SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

NEXT CYCLE
START

CV=zone
Is ZE Push button?
Motion detector?
broadcasted value
enabled?
YES NO (from RX1)

NO CV=2
YES

Host enabled Push button?

Motion detector?
CV=HO
(HE=1)?
NO
YES

CV=2
NO YES

CV=power-up
Time synched?
state (System PS)
NO

YES

Receive broad-
Push button? CV=broadcasted
cast channel
Motion detector? mode (network
enabled? YES
NO broadcast CV)

NO
YES

CV=2

Current active schedule

Push button? (CV) of the
Motion detector? highest priority
NO

YES

CV=2
(occ.)

Figure 3-2: SBC-VAV Priority to Determine the State of CV

Attributes F900;C1 through F900;C6 are the current value schedule attributes. These six points are read-
only attributes that reflect the actual schedule’s current mode of operation in which 0 = unoccupied, 1 =
warm-up, 2 = occupied, and 3 = night setback.

Attribute F900;AS is the active schedule bitmap. It is a read-only attribute that displays the currently active
schedules in bitmap form. When the bit corresponding to a particular schedule is set to 1, that schedule is
active for the day; if the bit is set to 0, the schedule is not active. Table 3-3 shows the correlation of each bit
in the bitmap to the individual schedules.

Table 3-3: Active Schedule Map

Bit
Schedule
Number

0 Schedule 1

1 Schedule 2

2 Schedule 3

3-12 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES SCHEDULES

Table 3-3: Active Schedule Map

Bit
Schedule
Number

3 Schedule 4

4 Schedule 5

5 Schedule 6

Attribute F900;HE is the host override enable. If HE = 1, then HO is used as the host override state. When
HE = 0, the scheduled state is controlled by WO, OC, UN and NS or schedule broadcast. The SBC-VAV
and its schedules are ignored provided ZE = 0 (disabled).

Attribute F900;HO is the host override. It specifies the desired schedule override state when schedule
attribute HE = 1. If HE = 0, then HO is not used. Setting HO to 0 represents unoccupied mode, HO = 1
represents warm-up, HO = 2 represents occupied mode and HO = 3 represents night setback.

Attribute F900;ZE is the zone schedule enable. It sets the current schedule mode for the entire zone from
an area controller that is broadcasting zone schedule information to multiple SBC-VAVs in the zone. When
enabled (ZE = 1), this attribute gives priority to schedule information received from the PUP network over
HO and the local schedules; CV will reflect the value broadcast over the network. Setting ZE = 0 (the
default) disables this feature.

Attribute F900;IS is the Inactive Schedule State. It determines which schedule state the SBC-VAV should
follow when AD is 0 (no active days). Valid schedule choices are unoccupied (IS = 0), warm-up (IS = 1),
occupied (IS = 2), and night setback (IS = 3). This attribute defines the CV value to use when local
scheduling is being used (the time is properly synchronized) but is inactive.

3.3.3 SCHEDULES 1 THROUGH 6

Attribute F90x;CV is the Current Schedule Value. It shows the current schedule state.

Attribute F90x.WO is Warm-Up On Time. It specifies the time (in HH:MM format) to begin the warm-up
period.

Attribute F90x;OC is Occupied Time. It specifies the time (in HH:MM format) to begin the occupied period
and end the warm-up period.

Attribute F90x;UN is Unoccupied Time. It specifies the time (in HH:MM format) to begin the unoccupied
period and end the occupied period.

Attribute F90x;NS is Night Setback Time. It specifies the time (in HH:MM format) to begin the night setback
period and end the unoccupied period.

Attribute F90x;AD is Active Days. It shows the active days of the week during which the schedule is to
follow the times in WO, OC, UN and NS. Valid day bit numbers are 0=Monday, 1=Tuesday, 2=Wednesday,
3=Thursday, 4=Friday, 5=Saturday, 6=Sunday and 7=Holiday. You can select active days by setting the
corresponding bits to 1.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-13

SCHEDULES SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Attribute F90x;AO is All-Day Override. It overrides the schedule in WO, OC, UN and NS for active days.
Settings are as follows: 0 = No Override, 1 = Unoccupied, 2 = Warm-Up, 3 = Occupied and 4 = Night
Setback.

Control loops of the SBC-VAV may be configured to use the current schedule state of selected schedules
to adjust setpoints or control parameters. In occupied mode, for example, a setpoint value is used to
determine when a certain control action occurs. In unoccupied mode, a setup (or setback) amount is
added to (or subtracted from, depending on its sign) the control loop setpoint—altering the point at which
the control action occurs. In unoccupied mode, the control action is less stringent because fewer (if any)
people are in the building.

Schedules in the SBC-VAV can be activated based on the values assigned to the Schedule attributes.
When the current day of the week matches the setting of the Schedule attribute active days (AD), that
schedule is active for the day.

The schedule mode attributes define four windows for a schedule that is active for a set of days in the
week. When the current day of the week matches one of the active schedule days (specified in AD), the
time of day determines which of the four available modes will dictate control strategy.

The active days for the schedule are designated by the AD attribute. It specifies a set of the eight possible
days in the week (seven days plus holiday) during which the schedule will run in one of the four available
modes at any given time of the active day. See Figure 3-3 for examples of how AD, WO, OC, UN and NS
work. Holiday schedules refer to the host system that defines the holidays in each month of the year. If the
SBC-VAV has bit 7 set for a currently active schedule, then the controller will follow that schedule when the
holiday bit is sent from the host. If the host broadcasts a holiday and the SBC-VAV does not have a holiday
schedule, then no schedules will be active until the host clears the holiday. All schedules are independent
of each other. One or more schedules may be active when the rest are inactive.

MO TU WE TH FR
start of first active day 00:00

05:30

08:00

17:30

00:00

05:30

08:00

17:30

00:00

05:30

08:00

17:30

00:00

05:30

08:00

17:30

00:00

05:30

08:00

17:30

00:00
start of inactive day

Night Setback Warmup Occupied Unoccupied

AD = MO TU WE TH FR Schedule Schedule Schedule Schedule
Window Window Window Window
WO = 05:30
OC = 08:00
UN = 17:30
NS = 00:00 ≥ 00:00 ≥ 05:30 ≥ 08:00 ≥ 17:30
< 05:30 < 08:00 < 17:30 < 00:00
CV = 3 CV = 1 CV = 2 CV = 0

Figure 3-3: Sample Schedule 1

3-14 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES SCHEDULES

Table 3-4 Schedule Attributes

attr description

Schedules
:
Summary
F900

Schedule Status—displays the schedule state of the SBC-VAV. The

order of priority is:
CV Occupied = 2
Warm-up = 1
Unoccupied = 0
Night Setback = 3

C1 Schedules 1-6—(read-only) reflect the active schedule’s current

- mode of operation.
C6

Active Schedule—(read-only) displays, in bitmap form, which

schedule is active.
0 = Schedule 1
1 = Schedule 2
AS
2 = Schedule 3
3 = Schedule 4
4 = Schedule 5
5 = Schedule 6

Host Override Enable—when enabled (HE = 1), HE allows the host

HE to set CV through HO. When disabled (HE = 0), the schedule state is
controlled by the local schedule or schedule broadcast.

Host Override—specifies the desired schedule override state when

HO
HE = 1.

Zone Schedule enable—sets the current schedule mode for the

entire zone form an area controller to multiple SBC-VAVs in the zone.
ZE When ZE = 1, priority is given to schedule information received from
the PUP network over HO and the local schedules. When ZE = 0, this
feature is disabled.

Inactive Schedule State—determines which schedule state the SBC-

IS
VAV should follow when AD (active days) is 0.

Schedules
:
Clock/
Calendar
F900

TM System Time—displays the system time in HH:MM format.

DT Current Date—specifies the current date in MM/DD/YY format.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-15

SCHEDULES SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Table 3-4 Schedule Attributes

attr description

Day—displays a code corresponding to the current day of the week.

0 = Monday
1 = Tuesday
2 = Wednesday
DA 3 = Thursday
4 = Friday
5 = Saturday
6 = Sunday
7 = Holiday

Holiday—toggles the holiday status for the current day. Time

DH
Synchronization overrides this point.

H0 Programmed Holiday—a specified date to be considered a holiday.

- Set the date to 0/0/YY to ignore.
H9

Schedules
:
(1-6)
F90x

CV Current Value—shows the current schedule state.

W Warm-up Time—specifies the time to begin warm-up period.

O

Occupied Time—specifies the time to begin occupied period and end

OC
warm-up period.

Unoccupied Time—specifies the time to begin unoccupied period

UN
and end occupied period.

Night Setback Time—specifies the time to begin night setback period

NS
and end unoccupied period.

Active Days—shows the days of the week during which the schedule
AD
is to follow WO, OC, UN, and NS.

All-day Override—overrides the schedules in WO, OC, UN, and NS.

0 = No Override
1 = Unoccupied
AO
2 = Warm-up
3 = Occupied
4 = Night Setback

3-16 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS)

3.4 TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS)

The following are Temperature attributes:
FE00;ZT, OF, DM, DL, BT, OI, ZS, TS, TM, TP, TT, TR, SD, SE, ED, ER, CC, SC, UC, NC, CH, SH, UH,
NH, SW, CV, LL, HL, HS, AS, AE, SU, BM, PU, PB, PS, PI, DS, DV, DF, T0-T3, G0-G3, RM, and PG.
FE08;CV, OF, RE, DD, SM, and OI.

3.4.1 THERMOSTAT
Attribute FE00;ZT is Zone Temperature. It shows the current temperature value measured by the
thermostat as adjusted by OF. This point is a read/write attribute stored in RAM. The data type of ZT (how
the value is displayed) is always FDh (signed 9.1 digits). By setting OI to 1, you can override ZT. After
overriding the attribute, you can write to ZT manually or through a program from a host controller on the
EIA-485 communications network.

CAUTION
Care must be taken to ensure that terminal
box operations are not adversely affected
during use of the SBC-VAV’s powerful
receive broadcast features. Selection of the
correct input is a must. Unitary controller
programmers should be absolutely sure that
the actions chosen in the system are exactly
what is needed for optimal operation of the
SBC-VAV.

Attribute FE00;OF is Temperature Correction. It defines an optional correction that may be required as an
adjustment for the thermostat location and the possible measurement errors.

Attribute FE00;DM is Zone Demand. It indicates the demand for the zone. A satisfied zone will indicate
“vent.” If the SBC-VAV is in cooling mode and the zone temperature exceeds the cooling setpoint, “cool” is
indicated. If the controller is in heating mode and the zone temperature falls below the heating setpoint,
“heat” is indicated.

Attribute FE00;DL is Demand Load. It indicates the heating/cooling demand for the zone in terms of
temperature separation from setpoints. A cooling demand will be indicated by a negative value and a
heating demand by a positive value. If the zone is satisfied, then the Demand Load will be 0. A cooling box
is satisfied whenever the zone temperature is lower than the setpoint. If the setpoint is 72 and zone
temperature is 74, then the demand load will be -2. A heating box is satisfied whenever the zone temperature is
greater than the setpoint. If the setpoint is 68 and the zone temperature is 72, then the demand load will be 0. If the
setpoint is 68 and the zone temperature is 66, then the demand load will be 2.

Attribute FE00;BT is VAV Control Mode. Control Modes are none (BT = 0), cooling only (BT = 1), heating
only (BT = 2), supply dependant (BT = 3) and cooling with reheat (BT = 4). The “disabled” setting supplies
a constant air volume. The supply dependant setting requires source/duct air temperature and
automatically selects cooling and heating modes as required.

Attribute FE00;OI is Override Temperature Value. When set to 1, it allows you to write to the Zone
Temperature (ZT) directly. This would allow the Zone Temperature to be defined remotely when you are
using alternate temperature sensors or diagnostics.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-17

TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS) SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

3.4.2 SETPOINT ADJUST

Attribute FE00;ZS is Zone Midpoint. It displays the midpoint between the current cooling and heating
setpoints. This attribute reflects changes in both setpoints. A change in ZS results in the appropriate shift
of both the cooling and heating setpoint maintaining the effective deadband.

Attribute FE00;TS is User Setpoint Offset. It defines an offset for application to PID setpoints. This point
shows the current value calculated when you multiply the User Adjust Position (TM) by the User Adjust
Increment (TP). This setting is temporary and is valid only for TT minutes unless TT = 0.

NOTE
You cannot set attribute TS with the SBC-
STAT1.

Attribute FE00;TM is User Adjust Increment. It specifies the magnitude of incremental changes to the User
Setpoint Offset (TS). The User Adjust Position (TP) is multiplied by TM to determine the User Setpoint
Offset (TS) value. If the User Adjust Increment is 0, you will not be able to alter the setpoint.

Attribute FE00;TP is User Adjust Position. The User Setpoint Offset (TS) can be raised or lowered in
integral steps. This attribute tracks the current step. It can be set to any signed integer but will be
constrained to +/2 when adjusted by an analog thermostat or to +/5 when set through a digital
thermostat. The point is used in combination with the User Adjust Increment (TM) to calculate the User
Setpoint Offset.

Attribute FE00;TT is User Adjust Duration. The User Setpoint Offset (TS) is a temporary setting. The TT
attribute defines in minutes the duration for which the setting applies. After that time, the User Adjust
Position and User Adjust Offset are reset to 0 degrees. If the User Adjust Duration is 0, then setpoint
changes remain in effect until modified.

Attribute FE00;TR is User Adjust Remaining. It displays the time remaining before the User Setpoint Offset
(TS) setting is reset.

Attribute FE00;SD is Calculated Setpoint Display. It specifies what method is used to display setpoint
adjustments on an SBC-STAT3 LCD screen. A value of 0 will display +/-2.5 adjustment. A value of 1 will
display the zone midpoint shown in FE00;ZS. A value of 2 will display the heating setpoint shown in
FE00;CH. A value of 3 will display the cooling setpoint shown in FE00;CC.

3.4.3 OVERRIDE
During scheduled unoccupied periods, control loop setpoints and analog input alarm limits may be set up
or set back to create a wider control range or deadband in the interest of conserving energy. The
occupancy override feature of the SBC-VAV allows the control loop setpoints and analog input alarm limits
to use their normal, nonsetup, nonsetback, occupied mode values through the SBC-STAT override
feature. For more information, see the SBC-STAT User Manual.

During a scheduled unoccupied mode, you can manually override the scheduled state to occupied mode
through the SBC-STAT; the setpoints are no longer set up or set back. The Override feature puts the
selected schedules into a temporary occupied mode.
Attribute FE00;SE is User Override. This attribute enables or disables the user's ability to enter extended
occupancy override.

3-18 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS)

Attribute FE00;ED is Extended Occupancy Duration. It specifies the amount of time in minutes to extend
occupancy.

Attribute FE00;ER is Extended Occupancy Remaining. It shows the amount of time remaining in extended
occupancy. This value is set to the Extended Occupancy Duration (ET) when either push button on an
analog thermostat is pressed. The SBC-STAT3 digital thermostat employs its User Menu for this function.
The point ER is a read-only attribute that cannot be changed directly.

NOTE
Attributes ED and ER will override the
power-up default schedule mode.

3.4.4 COOLING SETPOINTS

Attribute FE00;CC is Current Setpoint. It shows the current cooling temperature control setpoint. This will
depend on setbacks and user adjustments. The attribute is read-only and is derived from SC. It
incorporates TS and any unoccupied mode setback (UC) or any night setback (NC) that may be in effect.

Attribute FE00;SC is Occupied Setpoint. It shows the desired zone temperature setpoint to be used for
cooling control in occupied mode. This value is used in CC and defaults to 72.0F.

Attribute UC is Unoccupied Setback. It specifies, in +/- degrees, the amount to be added to the cooling
setpoint (SC) when the SBC-VAV schedule is in unoccupied mode. When the SBC-VAV is in an
unoccupied state, the UC offset is added to SC, resulting in CC. This is the value used to control the
cooling loop. When the SBC-STAT is enabled (SE 0), the values of TM (thermostatic multiplier) and TP
result in TS. This is added with UC and SC during unoccupied periods, resulting in CC. See Figure 3-4.
User-definable UC defaults to 5.0.

occupied cooling night setback cooling occupied cooling unoccupied cooling

control + NC = control + UC =
control control

Temp. Temp.

calculated cooling setpoint calculated cooling setpoint calculated cooling setpoint calculated cooling setpoint
CC = SC + TS CCC = SC + TS + NC CC = SC + TS CC = SC + TS + UC

Figure 3-4: Effect of NC and UC on Cooling Control Using an SBC-STAT

Attribute FE00;NC is Night SetBack. It specifies, in +/- degrees, the amount to be added to the cooling
setpoint (SC) when the SBC-VAV is in night setback mode. User definable NC defaults to 5.0. See Figure
3-4.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-19

TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS) SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

3.4.5 HEATING SETPOINTS

Attribute FE00;CH is Current Setpoint. It shows the current heating temperature control setpoint. This will
depend on setbacks and user adjustments. The point is read-only and is derived from SH. It incorporates
TS and any Unoccupied Setback (UH) or any night setback (NH) that may be in effect.

Attribute SH is Heating Setpoint. It shows the desired zone temperature setpoint to be used for heating
control.

Attribute FE00;UH is Unoccupied Setback. It specifies, in +/- degrees, the amount to be added to the
heating setpoint (SH) when the SBC-VAV schedule is in unoccupied mode. This attribute defaults to 10.0.

Attribute FE00;NH is Night SetBack. It specifies, in +/- degrees, the amount to be added to the heating
setpoint (SH) when the SBC-VAV is in night setback mode. This attribute defaults to 10.0. Figure 3-6
shows the effect of UH and NH on SBC-VAV control operations in a scheduled night setback mode.

Attributes FE00;SC and FE00;SH are the cooling and heating setpoint attributes. They create a
temperature range within which no cooling or heating is required (though minimum flow position is
enforced). This range is called the deadband. By pressing the up and down push buttons on the SBC-
STAT3 and SBC-STAT2, you can shift the deadband to a range higher or lower than the range set by SH
and SC. The result is a new range defined by CH and CC. When TS = 0, the deadband is defined by the
setpoint attributes SH and SC—for example, between 68F and 72F (4 degrees). However if you press
the up push button on the SBC-STAT3 or SBC-STAT2 to raise the temperature 4 degrees (TS = 4), then
the deadband still has the range—4 degrees. The control setpoints will then change to 72F and 76F. See
Figure 3-5.

unoccupied heating occupied night setback occupied heating

control - UH = control heating control - NH = control

Temp. Temp.

calculated heating setpoint calculated heathing setpoin calculated heating setpoint calculated heating setpoint
CC = SH + TS - UH CH = SH + TS CH = SH + TS - NH CH = SH + TS

Figure 3-5: The Effect of UH and NH on Cooling and Heating Setpoints

Table 3-5: CC and HC Formulas for Use With the SBC-STAT2 or STAT3

Schedule Mode Formula

CC = SC + (TS)
OCCUPIED
CH = SH + (TS)

CC = SC + (TS) + UC

UNOCCUPIED
CH = SH + (TS) UH

3-20 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS)

Table 3-5: CC and HC Formulas for Use With the SBC-STAT2 or STAT3

Schedule Mode Formula

CC = SC + (TS) + NC

NIGHT SETBACK
CH = SH + (TS)  NH

When an SBC-STAT1 is used with the SBC-VAV, CC and CH are calculated as in Table 3-6.

Table 3-6: CC and HC Formulas for Use With an SBC-STAT1

Schedule
Formula
Mode

CC = SC
OCCUPIED
CH = SH

CC = SC + UC
UNOCCUPIE
D CH = SH UH

CC = SC + NC
NIGHT
SETBACK CH = SH NH

Attributes FE00;CC and FE00;CH equal the temperature setpoints SC and SH, respectively. The CC and
CH points include a plus or minus offset in the calculation to account for setup and setback when the SBC-
VAV is in a scheduled unoccupied or night setback mode of operation. You can use the formulas in Table
3-5 to calculate CC and CH when SE 0. The value of TS will be a positive or a negative integer based on
the value of TP.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-21

TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS) SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

ZT
High-limit
Alarm

HL (high limit)

} HS
(hysteresis)

High-limit
Return CC

Low-limit
Return
CH

} HS (hysteresis)

LL (low limit)

Low-limit
Alarm

Figure 3-6: Effect of UH and NH on Control With an SBC-STAT

Attribute FE00;SW is Warm-Up Setpoint. It shows the zone temperature setpoint to be used for heating
control.

3.4.6 ALARMS
Attribute FE00;CV is Current Value. It shows the current value of the input. As a dedicated zone
temperature input, the data type is locked in as FDh (a signed 9.1 digit read out) PUP data type.

Attribute FE00;LL is Low Alarm Limit. It specifies the low alarm limit. If alarms are enabled and the current
value drops below this value, a low limit alarm will be generated.

Attribute FE00;HL is High Alarm Limit. It specifies the high alarm limit. If alarms are enabled and the
current value rises above this value, a high limit alarm will be generated.

Analog input alarming limits are defined using HL and LL. These limits create the upper and lower
temperature limits acceptable as zone temperature values to tenths of a degree. The attributes HL and LL
are only used when the input is configured for alarming. (See AE.) The setup/setback offset attribute SU
affects HL and LL. When SU is set for some value, HL and LL will effectively slide by the amount of SU
toward the positive side for HL and toward the negative side for LL when the SBC-VAV goes into
unoccupied or night setback schedule modes. Refer to Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8.

3-22 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS)

ZT
High-limit
Alarm

(unocc. limit)
HL + UC

} SH

HL (occ. limit)
High-limit
Return

Low-limit
Return
LL (occ. limit)

} SH

LL - NC
(unocc. limit)

Low-limit
Alarm

Figure 3-7: Input Alarming for ZT

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-23

TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS) SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

ZT
High-limit
Alarm

(unocc. limit)
HL + SU

} HS

HL (occ. limit)
High-limit
Return

Low-limit
Return
LL (occ. limit)

} HS

LL - SB
(unocc. limit)

Low-limit
Alarm

Figure 3-8: Unoccupied Shifting of Alarm Points Due to Setup/Setback

Attribute FE00;HS is Alarm Limit Hysteresis. It determines when the SBC-VAV returns from a high or low
limit alarm. In the case of a high limit alarm, the CV value must drop below HLHS to cause a high limit
return. For a low limit alarm, the CV value must rise above LL + HS to cause a low limit return.

Attribute FE00;AS is Alarm Status. It shows the current alarm condition. A value of 0 indicates a normal
condition; a nonzero number indicates alarm generation. Table 3-7 explains the status for each value.

Table 3-7: AS Values for Alarm Status

Alarm
Value of AS
Condition

normal (no
AS = 0
alarm)

AS = 5 low limit alarm

AS = 6 high limit alarm

Attribute FE00;AE is Enable Alarming. It specifies the type of alarm checking to be done on the CV value.
A value of 0 indicates that alarming is disabled; a nonzero number indicates one of several alarm
functions. Table 3-8 defines alarm options for AE.

3-24 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS)

To demonstrate how limit alarming operates, let HL = 80.5 while alarming is enabled for high limit
alarming (AE = 5). Then let’s say that the zone temperature changes from 72.0 to 83.0 because
someone opened an outside door in summertime. A high limit alarm is generated over the EIA-485
network because 83.0HL. This also causes the alarm status attribute AS to equal 6 (high limit alarm).
The SBC-VAV modulates the damper, providing more cool air to the zone. This action eventually begins to
lower the zone temperature. Once the zone temperature drops below HL and the offset defined by HS, the
alarm state returns to normal (AS = 0).

Table 3-8: AE Alarm Enable Options

Alarm Type
Value of AE
Enabled

AE = 0 disabled

AE = 4 low limit alarm

AE = 5 high limit alarm

low and high

AE = 6
limit

Attribute FE00;SU is Amount to Setup/Setback Alarm Limit. It specifies the amount added to HL or
subtracted from LL during unoccupied periods. This attribute effectively shifts the points at which alarms
and alarm returns are generated. Figure 3-8 illustrates the effects of setup/setback during unoccupied and
night setback modes. (Note that HS shifts with the new limits.)

3.4.7 SUPPLY
Attribute FE08;CV is Supply Temperature. It shows the current value of source/duct temperature. This is
used to select heating or cooling modes when BT is set to supply dependant provided that UI1 is equipped
with a thermistor. This value includes the OF offset adjustment.

Attribute FE08;OF is Supply Temperature Adjustment. It defines an offset used to adjust CV.

Attribute FE08;RE is Channel Reliability. This indicates whether or not the Supply/Duct Temperature value
can be trusted.

Attribute FE08;DD is Auto Mode Deadband. This defines the temperature difference by which the supply
air must either exceed the CH heating setpoint for a switch to heating mode or must fall below the CC
cooling setpoint to engage cooling mode.

NOTE
Attribute DD is for use when BT is in supply
dependant mode.

Attribute FE08;SM is Supply Mode. It indicates the current supply mode. This would be either Cooling or
Heating as specified by the System Box Type (BT). If BT is set to supply dependant, the point will indicate

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-25

TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS) SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

the current mode as determined by the source/duct temperature. The mode is cooling only if ST < ZT - DD
and ST < CC - DD. The mode is heating only if ST > ZT + DD and ST > CH + DD.

Attribute FE08;OI is Override Supply Temperature. When set to 1, this allows the Supply Temperature
(CV) to be altered manually.

3.4.8 SENSOR BUS

Attribute FE00;BM is Bus Mode. By default this should be set to Master (BM=0) unless multiple controllers
are wired onto a single Sensor Bus (SSB). All additional controllers on the SSB must be configured as
Slaves (BM=1). Masters control and communicate with digital thermostats. Slaves receive their
information from the Master. Slaves receive information from the following master Zone Temperature
attributes: Zone Temperature (ZT), User Setpoint Offset (TS), User Adjust Remaining (TR) and Extended
Occupancy Remaining (ER).

Attribute FE00;PU is User P.I.N. This Personal Identification Number controls access to the User Menu. A
value of 0 makes the menu always accessible. Values from 0001 to 9999 inclusive are used to control
access to the menu. A matching number must be entered by the User. Values of 10,000 or greater will hide
the menu. Entered P.I.N.s remain valid for only a short time after their use.

Attribute FE00;PB is Balancer P.I.N. This Personal Identification Number controls access to the Balance
Menu. A value of 0 makes the menu always accessible. Values inclusively from 1 to 9,999 are used to
control access to the menu. A matching number must be entered by the Balancer. Values of 10,000 or
greater will hide the menu. Entered P.I.N. numbers remain valid for only a short time after their use.

Attribute FE00;PS is Service P.I.N. This Personal Identification Number controls access to the Service
Menu. A value of 0 makes the menu always accessible. Values inclusively from 1 to 9,999 are used to
control access to the menu. A matching number must be entered by the Servicer. Values of 10,000 or
greater will hide the menu. Entered P.I.N.s remain valid for only a short time after their use.

Attribute FE00;PI is Installer P.I.N. This Personal Identification Number controls access to all menus. A
value of 0 makes all of the menus always accessible. Values inclusively from 1 to 9,999 are used to control
access. A matching number must be entered by the Installer. Values of 10,000 or greater will hide the
Install Menu. An authenticated Installer can access all menus. Entered P.I.N.s remain valid for only four
minutes after the last button press.

Attribute FE00;DS is Display Mode. It specifies whether English or Metric units are to be used for digital
thermostat display on the SBC-STAT3. This mode is automatically altered as appropriate when the system
Engineering Units attribute is set but may be modified later if required to display the alternate units.

Attribute FE00;DV is Display Value. By default (DV = 0) each digital thermostat will display the identical
temperature value (ZT) which is the average of each. With DV = 1 each thermostat will display its own
temperature (including offset).

Attribute FE00;DF is Display Format. This attribute defines the format used to display the current
temperature on the digital thermostat. The display of the tenths digit and the Fahrenheit/Celsius character
are options. Also, the display may be eliminated.

Attribute FE00;T0 is Reading Device 0. Up to 4 digital thermostats may be used on a single Sensor Bus.
This attribute reflects the raw (without offset) reading for Device 0.

Attribute FE00;T1 is Reading Device 1. Up to 4 digital thermostats may be used on a single Sensor Bus.
This attribute reflects the raw (without offset) reading for Device 1.

3-26 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS)

Attribute FE00;T2 is Reading Device 2. Up to 4 digital thermostats may be used on a single Sensor Bus.
This attribute reflects the raw (without offset) reading for Device 2.

Attribute FE00;T3 is Reading Device 3. Up to 4 digital thermostats may be used on a single Sensor Bus.
This attribute reflects the raw (without offset) reading for Device 3.

Attribute FE00;G0 is GID Device 0. The Global Identification for the Sensor Bus device.

Attribute FE00;G1 is GID Device 1 The Global Identification for the Sensor Bus device.

Attribute FE00;G2 is GID Device 2. The Global Identification for the Sensor Bus device.

Attribute FE00;G3 is GID Device 3. The Global Identification for the Sensor Bus device.

Attribute FE00;RM is Reading Mode. It specifies the technique used to determine Zone Temperature when
multiple thermostats are present. The default is Average mode (RM = 0). Highest (RM = 1) and Lowest
(RM = 2) modes set ZT appropriately. The Hi/Lo VST mode (RM = 3) selects either the highest or lowest
temperature depending on the supply mode. The highest temperature is used in cooling mode. The lowest
temperature in heating mode.

A specific thermostat may be selected by device position 0-3 (RM = 4-7). Note that while thermostats
appear in device positions consistently, the order may change when thermostats are added, removed or
replaced. To specify a unique thermostat by its GID, select the Primary GID mode (RM = 8) and define the
GID with the PG attribute.

When a single thermostat is present, its temperature is used regardless of the setting of RM. If a specified
thermostat is absent, the Average mode (RM = 0) is used.

Attribute FE00;PG is Primary GID. It specifies the GID of the Primary thermostat in Primary GID mode (RM
= 8). If this thermostat is not available, then the Average temperature mode (RM = 0) is used.

Table 3-9 Temperature Attributes

attr description

Temperature:
Thermostat
FE00

Zone Temperature—is the current temperature value measured by

ZT the thermostat as adjusted by OF. You can override ZT by setting OI
= 1.

Temperature Correction—defines an optional correction that may

OF be required as an adjustment for the thermostat location and the
possible measurement errors.

Zone Demand—indicates the demand for the zone. The options are
DM
vent, cool or heat.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-27

TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS) SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Table 3-9 Temperature Attributes

attr description

Demand Load—indicates the heating/cooling demand for the zone

in terms of temperature separation from setpoints.
DL
Cooling = negative value
Heating = positive value

VAV Control Mode—specifies the type of VAV terminal box being

BT
used.

Override Temperature Value—when set to 1, it allows you to write to

OI
FE00;ZT directly.

Temperature:
Setpoint Adjust
FE00

Zone Midpoint—displays the midpoint between the current cooling and

ZS
heating setpoints.

TS User Setpoint Offset—defines an offset to be applied to PID setpoints.

User Adjust Increment—specifies the magnitude of incremental changes to

TM
the User Setpoint Offset (FE00;TS).

User Adjust Position—the User Setpoint Offset (TS) can be raised or

TP
lowered in integral steps; the FE00;TP attribute tracks the current step.

User Adjust Duration—the User Setpoint Offset (TS) is a a temporary

TT setting; the FE00;TT attribute defines in minutes the duration for which the
setting applies.

User Adjust Remaining—displays the time remaining before the User

TR
Setpoint Offset (TS) setting is reset.

Calculated Setpoint Display—specifies what method is used to display

setpoint adjustments on an SBC-STAT3 LCD screen.
0 = Disable (+/-2.5)
SD
1 = Zone Midpoint (FE00;ZS)
2 = Heating Setpoint (FE00;CH)
3 = Cooling Setpoint (FE00;CC)

Temperature:
Override
FE00

User Override—enables or disables your ability to enter extended

SE
occupancy override.

Extended Occupancy Duration—specifies the amount of time in minutes to

ED
extend occupancy.

Extended Occupancy Remaining—shows the amount of time remaining in

ER
extended occupancy.

3-28 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS)

Table 3-9 Temperature Attributes

attr description

Temperature:
Cooling Setpoints
FE00

CC Current Setpoint—shows the current cooling flow control setpoint.

Occupied Setpoint—shows the zone temperature setpoint desired to begin

SC
cooling control.

Unoccupied Setback—specifies, +/- degrees, the amount to be added to

UC the cooling setpoint (SC) when the SBC-VAV schedule is in unoccupied
mode.

Night Setback—specifies, in +/- degrees, the amount to be added to the

NC
cooling setpoint (SC) when the SBC-VAV is in night setback mode.

Temperature:
Cooling Setpoints
FE00

CH Current Setpoint—shows the current heating flow control setpoint.

Occupied Setpoint—shows the zone temperature setpoint desired to begin

SH
heating control.

Unoccupied Setback—specifies, in +/- degrees, the amount to be added to

UH
the heating setpoint (SH) when the SBC-VAV is in night setback mode.

Night Setback—specifies, in +/- degrees, the amount to be added to the

NH
heating setpoint (HS) when the SBC-VAV is in night setback mode.

Warm-up Setpoint—shows the zone temperature setpoint desired for

SW
beginning warm-up heating control.

Temperature:
Alarms
FE00

CV Current Value—shows the current value of the input.

Low Alarm Limit—if alarms are enabled and the current value drops below
LL
this value, a low limit alarm will be generated.

High Alarm Limit—if alarms are enabled and the current value rises above
HL
this value, a high limit alarm will be generated.

Alarm Limit Hysteresis—determines when the SBC-VAV returns from a high

HS
or low limit alarm.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-29

TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS) SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Table 3-9 Temperature Attributes

attr description

Alarm Status—shows the current alarm condition.

0=normal
AS
5=low limit
6=high limit

Alarm Enable—specifies the type of alarm checking to be done on the CV

value.
0=disabled
AE
4=low limit alarm
5=high limit alarm
6=low and high limit

Alarm Limit Setup/Setback—specifies the amount added to HL or

SU
subtracted from LL during unoccupied periods.

Temperature:
Supply
FE08

CV Supply Temperature—shows the current value of source/duct temperature

OF Supply Temperature Adjustment—defines an offset used to adjust ST.

Channel Reliability—indicates whether or not the Supply/Duct Temperature

AE
value can be trusted.

Auto Mode Deadband—defines the temperature difference by which the

supply air must either exceed the FE00;HC heating setpoint to switch to
DD
heating mode or fall below the FE00;CC cooling setpoint to engage cooling
mode.

SM Supply Mode—indicates that supply air is usable for heating or cooling.

Override Supply Temperature—when set to 1, this attribute allows the

OI
Supply Temperature (ST) to be altered manually.

Temperature:
Cooling Setpoints
FE00

Bus Mode—should be set to Master (BM = 0) unless multiple controllers are

BM wired onto a SSB. Any additional controllers on the SSB must be configured
as Slaves (BM = 1).

User P.I.N.—this personal identification number controls access to the User

PU
Menu.

Balancer P.I.N.—this personal identification number controls access to the

PB
Balance Menu.

Service P.I.N.—this personal identification number controls access to the

PS
Service Menu.

3-30 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES TEMPERATURE (ANALOG INPUTS)

Table 3-9 Temperature Attributes

attr description

Installer P.I.N.—This personal identification number controls access to all

PI
menus.

Display Mode—specifies whether English or Metric units are to be used for

DS
the digital thermostat display.

Display Value—when DV = 0 each digital thermostat displays the identical

DV temperature value (average) (FE00;ZT). When DV = 1 each thermostat
displays its own temperature.

Display Format—defines the format used to display the current

DF
temperature on the digital thermostat.

T0 Reading Device 0—is the raw reading for Device 1 on a SSB.

T1 Reading Device 1—is the raw reading for Device 2 on a SSB.

T2 Reading Device 2— is the raw reading for Device 3 on a SSB.

T3 Reading Device 3—is the raw reading for Device 4 on a SSB.

G0 GID Device 0—is the global identification for the SSB device.

G1 GID Device 1— is the global identification for the SSB device.

G2 GID Device 2—is the global identification for the SSB device.

G3 GID Device 3—is the global identification for the SSB device.

Reading Mode—is the technique used to determine Zone

Temperature when multiple thermostats are present.
0 = Average Mode
1 = Highest
2 = Lowest
RM 3 = Hi/Lo VST mode
4 = Device position 0
5 = Device position 1
6 = Device position 2
7 = Device position 3
8 = Primary GID mode

Primary GID—is the GID of the Primary thermostat in Primary GID mode
PG
(RM = 8)

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-31

FLOW SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

3.5 FLOW
The following are Flow attributes:
FA00;CV, CD, CA, OF, AC, FH, CK, KC, K2, FC, DM, CB, OI, DP, EP, EF, DM, DC, DD, AT, AS, and RZ.
FA01;CM, CX, CP, CI, HM, HX, HP, HI, WM, WX, WP, WI, AS, AM, RP, DB.
FA05;CV, LL, HL, HS, AS, AE, and SU.
FC02;PF, DR, IC, MF, and PD.

3.5.1 CONTROL
Attribute FA00;CV is Current Value. It shows the current real time measured amount of airflow in CFM.
This attribute is read-only, but you can overwrite it when OI = 1.

Attribute FA00;CD is Target Flow. It shows the desired flow (cfm) setpoint calculated by the cooling or
heating PI loops. You can write to this point only in Manual mode or with CAV Box Type. When set
manually, this point is preserved in EEPROM configuration memory. Manual Target Flow settings are no
longer lost when power is removed. This feature is required for CAV applications.

Attribute FA00;CA is Average Flow. It shows the measured average flow in cfm. This read only point
displays an average of CV, the actual air flow measured by the SBC-VAV flow sensor (whether the terminal
box is cooling or heating). This point will track and follow CD as the SBC-VAV controls the air flow by
modulating the duct damper.

Attribute FA00;OF is Flow Offset. It defines an offset or adjustment applied to the target flow. When
operated in Auto (FA00;AC=1) or Tracking (FA00;AC=2) mode, the Flow Offset is added to the derived
target. The Target Flow (FA00;CD) includes this offset.

Attribute FA00;AC is Control Mode. When set to Auto, the Target Flow (CD) is determined by the control
algorithms and setpoints. Select Manual to override the Target Flow. A VAV controller functioning as a
slave device to a master VAV on the SSB can be set to “track” the current average flow of the master. With
the flow channel of the slave set for Tracking (FA00;AC=2), the Target Flow (FA00;CD) is derived from the
Average Flow (FA00;CA) of the master VAV offset by the Flow Offset (FA00;OF) established for the slave.

Attribute FA00;FH is Flow Hysteresis. It specifies the maximum amount of flow sensor variation to be
tolerated by the SBC-VAV before showing a valid change of flow. This point allows you to set a hysteresis,
or deadband, centered around the calculated air flow value. This hysteresis prevents bouncing of the air
flow value. Such bouncing is usually prevalent at the lower and higher ends of the air flow range,
potentially creating situations in which the damper may be toggled because of controller response. Air flow
values (CV) must be greater than or less than the upper and lower limits defined around CV by FH. Figure
3-9 illustrates the boundaries set around CV when FH 0. This attribute defaults to 20.

Control Control

Deadband
(No Control Action)

air flow
(CFM or
lps)

CV

CV - FH CV + FH

Figure 3-9: Flow Hysteresis Around FA00;CV When FH > 0

3-32 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES FLOW

Attribute FA00;CK is Duct Scaling Factor. It shows the scaling factor for the particular VAV box being used.
An initial scaling factor may be calculated as 4,005 times the effective area of the duct in square feet. The
default is 786 (for a 6" round duct). This scaling factor may be automatically calculated using 1-Point
Calibration (KC).

Attribute FA00;KC is 1-Point Calibration. Enter the CFM value measured externally, and this will
automatically adjust the Duct Scaling Factor CK based on the present flow reading to properly scale the
duct. Note that this does not perform the function if 0 is entered or if CV is overridden.

Attribute FA00;K2 is 2-Point Calibration. It accepts a measured CFM value that is at least 100 CFM
different than that last entered in KC. Both this measured CFM value and that entered in KC are then used
to calibrate. This provides for an improved flow calibration.

Attribute FA00;FC is Fan. It controls the current status of the fan output.

Attribute FA00;DM is Damper Mode. Through this point, you can command the damper to open fully
(DM=1). The attribute includes settings that force the damper to control cooling minimum flow (DM=2),
cooling maximum flow (DM=3), Heating minimum flow (DM=4), heating maximum flow (DM=5,) warm-up
minimum flow (DM=6) and warm-up maximum flow (DM=7). Enabling either CM, CX, HM, HX, WM, or
WX forces the target flow (CD) to the appropriate flow setting. Manual/Auto Target Flow values are
restored when the damper is returned to Automatic (DM=0).

Attribute FA00;CB is Calibrate Flow Sensor. It allows a host or operator to manually calibrate the flow
sensor (Zero Offset) based on the complete absence of airflow once the unit is installed in the field.
Calibration occurs when you completely shut down the air supply and set CB = 1. Once the SBC-VAV runs
through its calculations and adjusts for zero air flow, CB automatically resets itself to 0.

Attribute FA00;OI is Override Flow Measurement. It allows a host or operator to manually set the value of
the Current Flow. If OI is set to 0, overriding is disabled. If OI is set to 1, the current flow can manually be
changed or can be written to by an area controller.

3.5.2 COOLING
Attribute FA01;CM is Cooling Minimum Flow. It shows the allowable minimum (cooling) duct flow, in CFM,
required while the controller is at the calculated cooling setpoint (Analog Output CC). See Figure 3-10.

The point FA01;CM has a range of 0 to 65,535 with a default of 100.

Attribute FA01;CX is Cooling Maximum Flow. It shows the allowable maximum (cooling) duct flow. This
point has a range of 0–65,535 and defaults to 500.

Attribute FA01;CP is Cooling Proportional Band. It specifies, in degrees (0.0 to 100), the offset from the
calculated cooling control setpoint that determines the proportional band for damper control. The damper
controls air flow based on area temperature from CM (cooling minimum flow) to CX (cooling maximum
flow) when cooling is called for by the controller. This point defaults to 5.0. See Figure 3-10. The cooling
proportional band is an offset that begins at the calculated cooling control setpoint (CC). The cooling
proportional band ends at CC + CP. The attribute CC defaults to 5.0.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-33

FLOW SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Damper
Position
CP

cooling proportional
band CX
cooling
max flow

CM
cooling
min flow

temp temp
(cooler) (warmer)

CC
cooling
setpoint

Figure 3-10: Cooling Only Mode

NOTE
The attribute CC reflects the thermostat
setpoint value of the SBC-STAT and any
setback, whereas CS does not. The SBC-
VAV uses CC in its control algorithm.

Attribute FA01;CI is Cooling Integration Constant. It shows the amount of proportional error history (0 to
25.5%) used to calculate the desired position for the cooling duct damper. This point is also used to
calculate the error for the heating proportional band in Heating Only mode. The attribute is calculated each
time the loop runs (once per second) creating an accumulated integral sum. This “integral sum,” applied
once per minute, is used to control overshoot while the loop is operating within the confines of the
proportional band. Figure 3-11 illustrates the concepts of control using proportional only and proportional +
integral action. This point defaults to 0.0.

3-34 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES FLOW

Proportional Only Control

Proportional + Integral

Figure 3-11: Examples of Proportional and Proportional + Integral Control

CH
Heating Setpoint

Figure 3-12: Heating Only Mode

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-35

FLOW SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

The P+I control loop controls the amount of integral (integral sum) that is accumulated during use of the
antireset windup strategy. When the control loop reaches its maximum (maximum air flow) or its minimum
(minimum air flow), the integral sum is dumped. Integral will begin to calculate again when the control is
once more within the proportional band.

3.5.3 HEATING
Attribute FA01;HM is Heating Minimum Flow. It shows the allowable minimum heating duct flow during
heating. The point HM has a range of 0–65,535 and defaults to 100.

Attribute FA01;HX is Heating Maximum Flow. It shows the allowable maximum heating duct flow during
heating. This attribute defaults to 500 and can be set from 0 to 65,535.

Attribute FA01;HP is Heating Proportional Band. It specifies, in degrees (0.0 to 100), the offset from the
calculated heating control setpoint that determines the proportional band for the heating duct damper
control. This point is an offset from HC (calculated heating setpoint) creating an operational band in which
the damper controls air flow based on area temperature from HM (heating minimum flow) to HX (heating
maximum flow) when heating is called for by the controller. Attribute HP defaults to 5.0. Refer to Figure 3-
12.

Attribute FA01;HI is Heating Integration Constant. It shows the amount of proportional error history (0 to
25.5%) used to calculate the desired position for the heating duct damper. The value for this point is
calculated each time that the loop runs (once per second) creating an accumulated integral sum. This
integral sum, applied once per minute, is used to control overshoot while the loop is separating within the
confines of the proportional band. Attribute HI defaults to 0.0.

The P+I control loop controls the amount of integral (integral sum) that is accumulated by using an
antireset windup strategy. When the control loop reaches its maximum (maximum air flow) or its minimum
(minimum air flow), the integral sum is dumped. Integral will begin to be calculated again when the control
is once more within the proportional band.

3.5.4 UNOCCUPIED
Attribute FA01;MD is Min Flow Overrides. It specifies the method of overriding the target flow during
unoccupied schedule periods. By default, this is configured as None. When set as “Use UM”, the target
flow that the VAV will control by will be the value defined in FA01;UM in the event where there is a mis-
match between the Supply Demand (FE08;SM) and the Zone Temperature demand. When set for
“Incorrect Supply” and the schedule mode is other than Occupied, the VAV’s target flow will equal
FA01;UM. When set for “Both”, both conditions will apply.

Attribute FA01;UM is Unoccupied Minimum Flow. This defines the flow setpoint that the VAV will follow
during Unoccupied periods.

3.5.5 WARM-UP
Attribute FA01;WM is Warm-Up Minimum Flow. It shows the allowable minimum heating duct flow during
warm-up.

The SBC-VAV provides for user tailored warm-up operation through attribute settings. (See the Schedules
subsection of this section.) Attribute WX is Warm-up Maximum Flow. It shows the allowable maximum
(heating) duct flow during warm-up which can be called for by schedule. This attribute defaults to 400 and
has a setting range of 0 to 65,535.

3-36 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES FLOW

Attribute FA01;WP is Warm-Up Proportional Band. It specifies, in degrees (0.0 to 100), the offset from the
calculated heating control setpoint that determines the proportional band for the warm-up heating duct
damper control.

Attribute FA01;WI is Warm-Up Integration Constant. It shows the amount of proportional error history (0 to
25.5%) used to calculate the desired position for the heating duct damper.

3.5.6 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

2
Attribute FA01;AS is the Air Quality Setpoint. This value should be set to the acceptable CO level in the
zone. A value of zero (0) will disable the Indoor Air Quality application.

2
Attribute FA01;DB is a deadband which specifies the CO variable range over which the damper is
controlled.

Attribute FA01;RP is the Air Quality Damper Ramp Rate. It is the percentage rate per minute that the
damper moves to compensate for the change in CO2 levels.

Attribute FA01;AM is the Air Quality Control Max Air Flow. It specifies the allowable maximum air flow.

3.5.7 DAMPER
Attribute FA00;DP is Damper Position. It shows the damper position when using an actuator with built-in
feedback potentiometer (SBC-VAVrf, -VAVtf).

Attribute FA00;EP is Estimated Target Position. It shows the estimated target position with which the loop
should control the damper to bring the flow closer to the setpoint. A change in EP causes the actuator to
drive in the proper control direction.

Attribute FA00;EF is Estimated Flow at Full Open. It shows the estimated flow at full open in cfm. This
attribute is used when the damper control attribute is set to Pressure Dependant (FA00;DC=0).

Attribute FA00;DM is Damper Mode. Through this point, you can command the damper to open fully
(DM=1). The attribute includes settings that force the damper to control cooling minimum flow (DM=2),
cooling maximum flow (DM=3), Heating minimum flow (DM=4), heating maximum flow (DM=5,) warm-up
minimum flow (DM=6) and warm-up maximum flow (DM=7). Enabling either CM, CX, HM, HX, WM, or
WX forces the target flow (CD) to the appropriate flow setting. Manual/Auto Target Flow values are
restored when the damper is returned to Automatic (DM=0).

Attribute FA00;DC is Damper Control. It defines the method used to control the damper. For Pressure
Dependant mode (FA00;DC=0), the damper position is estimated based on the target flow (FA00;CD) and
the estimated maximum flow (FA00;EF). In Measured Flow mode (FA00;DC=1), the damper is modulated
to maintain the target flow (FA00;CD). Dual Mixed (CAV) mode (FA00;CD=2) enables both the internal DC
actuator control and the remote AC actuator (K4-K5). The DC actuator performs the pressure dependant
function while the AC actuator maintains constant flow. In Dual Mixed mode, FA00;CD is set to the desired
CAV setting, however, the PID loop continues to calculate the desired DC damper position.

Attribute FA00;DD is Damper Direction. It is used to set the direction of the damper motor. When the
attribute is set to 0, the motor turns in the normal direction. With the attribute set to 1, the motor turns in the
opposite direction.

Attribute FA00;AT is Actuator Type. It defines the type and connection for the damper actuator. Actuators
with ac power will use the optional triac outputs K4 and K5. Those with DC power use the standard

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-37

FLOW SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

actuator connector. Motor Management Technology supports the Belimo LM24-M and LM24-10P-M. You
can also choose None if you are not using an actuator with your SBC-VAV.

Attribute FA00;AS is Actuator Status. It reports the status of the actuator as determined by MMT. Possible
values are Ready, Disconnected/Open and Jammed/Shorted. Diagnostic alarms and returns are issued
when this status changes.

Attribute FA00;RZ is Rejuvenate Count. When MMT detects the possibility of an actuator short, electrical
pulses are used to rejuvenate the motor. Each pulse is tallied by this attribute. The Actuator Status is
changed to indicate the short if it is not rectified after 10 consecutive pulses. The Rejuvenate Count can be
used to determine the general well-being of the actuator

3.5.8 ALARMS
Attribute FA05;CV is Current Value. It shows the current measured amount of airflow in cfm.

Attribute FA05;LL is Low Alarm Limit. It specifies the low alarm limit. If alarms are enabled and the current
value (CV) drops below this value, a low limit alarm will be generated.

Attribute FA05;HL is High Alarm Limit. It specifies the high alarm limit. If alarms are enabled and the
current value (CV) rises above this value, a high limit alarm will be generated.

Attribute FA05;HS is Alarm Limit Hysteresis. It determines when the SBC-VAV returns from a high or low
limit alarm. In the case of a high limit alarm, the CV value must drop below HLHS to cause a high limit
return. For a low limit alarm, the CV value must rise above LL + HS to cause a low limit return.

Attribute FA05;AS is Alarm Status. It shows the current alarm condition. A value of 0 indicates a normal
condition; a nonzero number indicates alarm generation. This attribute is read-only. Table 3-10 explains
the condition for each value.

Table 3-10: Values for Alarm Status Attribute AS

Alarm
Value of AS
Condition

AS = 0 normal

AS = 5 low limit

AS = 6 high limit

Attribute FA05;AE is Alarm Enable. It specifies the type of alarm checking to be done on the CV value. A 0
indicates that alarming is disabled; a nonzero value indicates one of several alarm functions. Table 3-11
lists the options for AE.

3-38 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES FLOW

Table 3-11: AE Alarm Enable Options

Alarm Type
Value of AE
Enabled

AE = 0 disabled

AE = 4 low limit alarm

AE = 5 high limit alarm

low and high

AE = 6
limit

Attribute FA05;SU is Amount to Setup/Setback Alarm Limit. It specifies the amount added to HL or
subtracted from LL during unoccupied periods. Figure 3-13 illustrates the effect of SU during unoccupied
mode.

High-limit CV
Alarm

HL+SU (unocc. high limit)

} HS (unocc. hysteresis)

HL (occ. high limit)

High-limit
Return
} HS (occ. hysteresis)

HS (occ. hysteresis)
Low-limit
Return
} LL (occ. low limit)

} HS (unocc. hysteresis)

LL-SU
Low-limit (unocc. low limit)
Alarm

Figure 3-13: Unoccupied Setup/Setback Alarm Shifting

3.5.9 PROOF OF FLOW

Attribute FC02;PF is Proof of Flow. It shows the status of the Proof of Flow, the flow control CV (when CV
is used as a proof of flow switch) and is only valid when DR = 2 or 3.

Attribute FC02;DR is Method. This defines the requirements for Proof of Flow. Indication of Positive Flow
always appears if None is selected (DR = 0). If Minimum Flow is selected (DR = 1), then the Measured
Flow must exceed MF for a Positive Flow indication to occur. If Paddle Switch (DR = 2) is selected, then
the UI1 input must be nonzero for a Positive Flow indication. You may select Both (DR = 3) for cases in
which both the minimum flow reading AND a nonzero UI1 is required.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-39

FLOW SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Attribute FC02;IC is Digital Input. Selects the digital input where a non-zero value indicates flow.

Attribute FC02;MF is Minimum Required Flow. It is the minimum flow reading required to indicate Positive
Flow. The flow reading from the flow control CA is used. This is a long term average and provides
sufficient filtering to prevent false Proof of Flow indications. This point works in conjunction with DR
indicating a user definable flow that allows reheats to be engaged. The attribute is used only when DR = 1
or 3.

Attribute FC02;PD is Proof of Flow Delay. It shows the amount of time, from 0 to 255 seconds, imposed
before the enabling of a positive flow indication.

Table 3-12 Flow Attributes

attr description

Flow:
Control
FA00

CV Current Value—shows the current measured amount of airflow in cfm.

Target Flow—shows the desired flow (cfm) setpoint calculated by the cooling
CD
or heating PI loops.

CA Average Flow—shows the measured average flow in cfm.

Flow Offset—defines an offset or adjustment applied to the target flow.

When operated in Auto (FA00;AC=1) or Tracking (FA00;AC=2) mode, the
OF
Flow Offset is added to the derived target. The Target Flow (FA00;CD)
includes this offset.

Control—when set for Auto, the Target Flow (CD) is determined by the
control algorithms and setpoints. A VAV controller functioning as a slave
device to a master VAV on the SSB can be set to “track” the current average
AC flow of the master. With the flow channel of the slave set for Tracking
(FA00;AC=2), the Target Flow (FA00;CD) is derived from the Average Flow
(FA00;CA) of the master VAV offset by the Flow Offset (FA00;OF)
established for the slave.

Flow Hysteresis—specifies the maximum amount of flow sensor variation to

FH
be tolerated by the SBC-VAV before it shows a valid change of flow.

Duct Scaling Factor (K)—shows the scaling factor for the particular VAV box
CK
being used.

1-Point Calibration—when you enter the cfm value measured externally, this
KC will automatically adjust the Duct Scaling Factor (CK) based on the present
flow reading to properly scale the duct.

2-Point Calibration—accepts a measured cfm value that is at least 100 cfm

different than that last entered in KC. Both this measured cfm value and that
K2
entered in KC are then used to calibrate. This provides for an improved flow
calibration.

3-40 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES FLOW

Table 3-12 Flow Attributes

attr description

FC Fan—shows the current status of the fan output.

Damper Mode—can be used to command the damper to fully open or to

DM
operate at minimum or maximum cooling, heating and warm-up setpoints.

Calibrate Flow Sensor—allows a host or operator to manually calibrate the

CB
flow sensor.

Override Current Value—allows a host or operator to manually set the value

OI
of the current flow.

Flow:
Cooling
FA01

CM Cooling Minimum Flow—shows the allowable minimum (cooling) duct flow.

CX Cooling Maximum Flow—shows the allowable maximum (cooling) duct flow.

Cooling Proportional Band—specifies, in degrees (0.0 to 25.5), the offset

CP from the calculated cooling control setpoint CC that determines the
proportional band for damper control.

Cooling Integration Constant—shows the amount of proportional error

CI history (0 to 100%) used to calculate the desired position for the cooling duct
damper.

Flow:
Heating
FA01

Heating Minimum Flow—shows the allowable minimum heating duct flow

HM
during heating.

Heating Maximum Flow—shows the allowable maximum heating duct flow

HX
during heating.

Heating Proportional Band—specifies, in degrees (0.0 to 25.5), the offset

HP from the calculated heating control setpoint that determines the proportional
band for the heating duct damper control.

Heating Integration Constant—shows the amount of proportional error

HI history (0 to 100%) used to calculate the desired position for the heating duct
damper.

Flow:
Unoccupi
ed
FA01

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-41

FLOW SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Table 3-12 Flow Attributes

attr description

Min Flow Overrides - It specifies the method of overriding the target flow
during unoccupied schedule periods. By default, this is configured as None.
When set as “Use UM”, the target flow that the VAV will control by will be the
value defined in FA01;UM in the event where there is a mis-match between
MD
the Supply Demand (FE08;SM) and the Zone Temperature demand. When
set for “Incorrect Supply” and the schedule mode is other than Occupied, the
VAV’s target flow will equal FA01;UM. When set for “Both”, both conditions
will apply.

Unoccupied Minimum Flow - This defines the flow setpoint that the VAV will
UM
follow during Unoccupied periods.

Flow:
Warm-up
FA01

Warm-up Minimum Flow—shows the allowable minimum heating duct flow

WM
during warm-up heating.

Warm-up Maximum Flow—shows the allowable maximum heating duct flow

WX during
warm-up heating.

Warm-up Proportional Band—specifies in degrees (0.0 to 25.5) the offset

WP from the calculated heating control setpoint that determines the proportional
band for the warm-up heating duct damper control.

Warm-up Integration Constant—shows the amount of proportional error

WI history (0 to 100%) used to calculate the desired position for the heating duct
damper.

Flow:
Indoor Air
Quality
FA01

2
Air Quality Setpoint—specifies value should be set to the acceptable CO
AS level in the zone. A value of zero (0) will disable the Indoor Air Quality
application.

DB Air Quality Deadband—specifies the CO2 variable range over which the
control of the damper is stroked.

Air Quality Damper Ramp Rate—specifies the percentage rate per minute
RP 2
that the damper moves to compensate for the change in CO levels.

AM Air Quality Control Max Air Flow—specifies the allowable maximum air flow.

Flow:
Damper
FA00

3-42 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES FLOW

Table 3-12 Flow Attributes

attr description

Position—shows the damper position with an optional actuator having a built

DP
in feedback potentiometer.

Damper Mode—can be used to command the damper to fully open or to

DM
operate at minimum or maximum cooling, heating and warm-up setpoints.

Estimated Target Position—shows the estimated target position with which

EP the loop should control the valve to bring the measured input variable closer
to the setpoint.

Estimated Flow at Full Open—shows the estimated flow at full open in cfm.
EF
(Used when Damper Control is pressure dependant.)

Damper Control—defines the method used to control the damper. For

'Pressure
Dependant' mode (DC = 0), the damper position is estimated based on the
target flow (CD) and the estimated maximum flow (EF). In 'Measured
Flow' mode (DC = 1 default) the damper is modulated to maintain the target
DC
flow (CD). In Dual Mixed CAV (DC = 2) mode, both the internal DC actuator
and the remote AC actuator (K4-K5) are enabled. The DC actuator performs
the 'Pressure Dependant' function while the AC actuator maintains constant
flow. Note that in this mode, CD is set to the desired CAV setting, however,
the PID loop continues to calculate the desired DC damper position.

DD Direction—used to set the direction of the damper motor.

AT Actuator Type—defines the type and connection for the damper actuator.

Actuator Status—reports the status of the actuator as determined by the

AS
MMT.

Rejuvenate Count— when MMT detects the possibility of an actuator short,

RZ
electrical pulses are used in an attempt to rejuvenate the motor.

Flow:
Alarms
FA05

CV Current Value—shows the current measured amount of airflow in cfm.

Low Alarm Limit—if alarms are enabled and the current value drops below
LL
this value, a low limit alarm will be generated.

High Alarm Limit—if alarms are enabled and the current value rises above
HL
this value, a high limit alarm will be generated.

Alarm Limit Hysteresis—determines when the SBC-VAV returns from a high

HS
or low limit alarm.

AS Alarm Status—shows the current alarm condition.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-43

FLOW SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Table 3-12 Flow Attributes

attr description

Alarm Enable—specifies the type of alarm checking to be done on the CV

AE
value.

Alarm Limit Setup/Setback—specifies the amount added to HL or subtracted

SU
from LL during unoccupied periods.

Flow:
Proof of
Flow
FC02

PF Proof of Flow—shows the status of the proof of flow.

DR Method—defines the requirements for proof of flow.

IC Digital Input—selects the digital input where a non-zero value indicates flow.

Minimum Required Flow—the minimum flow reading required in order to

MF
indicate positive flow.

Flow Proof Delay—shows the amount of time, in seconds, imposed before

PD
enabling a positive flow indication.

3-44 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES AUXILIARY

3.6 AUXILIARY
The following are Auxiliary attributes:
FB01;FO, FS, SF, FC, and CV.
FA03;RO, FR, AV, EN, AF, MX, BA, OF, and ID.
FA08 and FA09;ST, VU, VM, VA, VD, UT, RI, VO, VP, VI, VT, PP, TL,TH, CD, and AM.
FA11;SP, CS, PO, AO, IN, IC, MR, RC, RV, RS, RL, DB, PB, RP, RT, SG, SU, and CE.
FC01;MS, IC, MD, MT, and MR.

3.6.1 FAN
Attribute FB01;FO is Fan/Damper Mode. It is used to configure the fan or damper. The options are No Fan/
Induction Damper (FO = 0), Series Fan (FO = 1), Parallel Fan (FO = 2) and Induction Damper (FO = 3).

Attribute FB01;FS is Fan Setpoint. It allows you to define the setpoint, in cubic feet per minute or liters of
air flow as measured by the flow control CA, at which the fan or induction damper is enabled so that it can
assist the terminal box in maintaining the minimum air flow requirements.

Table 3-13 describes the conditions that must be met for the output to be enabled/disabled (on or off).

Attribute FB01;SF is Unoccupied Series Fan. When a series fan box type is selected (FO = 1), SF defines
how the series fan is controlled during unoccupied periods. If SF = 0 (default value), the series fan is
always on during unoccupied periods.

When SF = 1, the series fan control is based on the zone temperature (ZT). If ZT is within the deadband
created by the calculated heating and cooling control setpoints (Flow CC and Flow CH), then the series fan
is shut off during unoccupied periods. If ZT extends above or beyond the deadband, the series fan is
turned on during unoccupied periods. Refer to Figure 3-14.

Attribute FB01;FC is Fan Minimum Cycle Time. It shows the minimum amount of time, in minutes (0.0 to
25.5), that the fan output will stay energized or de-energized. This prevents short cycling of the fan output.

Attribute FB01;CV is Fan. It defines the status of the fan output.

Table 3-13: Fan Setpoint

If FS = 0 If FS > 0
and and
Current State
ZT < CH ZT > CH ZT < CH ZT > CH

Flow Flow
Occupied On Off
Controlled Controlled

Unoccupied On Off On Off

Warm-up On Off On Off

Night Setback On Off On Off

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-45

AUXILIARY SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Deadband
Series Series
(Series Fan Off)
Fan Fan
On On

HC CC

Figure 3-14: Unoccupied Series Fan Operation With BT = 1 and SF = 1

3.6.2 ELECTRIC REHEAT

The SBC-VAV provides electric reheat capabilities with four stage electric reheat available.

Attribute FA03;RO is Reheat Options. It is used to configure the SBC-VAV's outputs for electric reheat. The
options are Disabled (default), 2-Stage (K2–3), 2-Stage (K4–5), and 4-Stage (K2–5). Table 3-14 lists the
options offered by RO.

Table 3-14: Options of RO

Value of
Option
RO

disabled (no
0
reheat)

two stages of
1 electric reheat (K2
& 3)

two stages of
2 electric reheat (K4
& 5)

four stages of
3 electric reheat
(K2,3,4 & 5)

Attribute FA03;FR is Stages Requiring Flow. It defines by the appropriate bit setting which of the available
reheat stages requires a Positive Flow indication (see Proof of Flow). Not all sources of auxiliary heat
(perimeter heating for instance) will require verification of air flow. By default all stages require a Positive
Flow indication.

Attribute FA03;AV is Available Stages. It displays the stages that are currently available for use. This
depends on the current options (RO) and the presence of a positive flow indication. Other uses of the
digital outputs (ac actuator, for instance) may remove those stages from reheat availability. This attribute is
read-only.

Attribute FA03;EN is Energized Stages. It displays those reheat stages that are currently energized. This
attribute is read-only.

3-46 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES AUXILIARY

Attribute FA03;AF is Require Max Airflow. If set to Yes (AF = 1), it holds off the addition of reheat stages
until the PID loop calls for maximum airflow. This gives the damper priority in satisfying the heating
demand. For proper operation, a Heating Integration Constant (Damper Control attribute HI) should be
used. This permits the PID loop to reach a maximum target airflow when the supply air is unable to satisfy
the zone.

Attribute FA03;MX is Maximum Supply Temperature. It establishes a maximum supply duct temperature
above which the reheats will deenergize. If no supply temperature is available set MX to 999.0 to disable
this lockout.

Attribute FA03;BA is Balance Stage Usage. If set to Yes (BA = 1), it considers the Run Hour Totals (Digital
Output RH) for the individual digital outputs in energizing reheat stages. Stages with lower usage will be
energized first. The result is the balanced use of these stages. For best operation, all stages should be
nearly equivalent. The default setting does not perform balancing.

Attribute FA03;OF is Reheat Offset. It specifies, in degrees, the offset from the calculated heating control
setpoint (HC) that determines the temperature below which additional reheat stages can be energized. In
addition to this, the AF attribute may be set to hold off the addition of stages. For temperatures below the
heating setpoint but within the Reheat Offset of it, reheat stages are de-energized at 30 second intervals.

Attribute FA03;ID is Stage Delay. It shows the minimum amount of time, in minutes, before the next reheat
stage will be energized. Stages are energized at this interval until the zone temperature rises to within the
Reheat Offset of the Heating Setpoint. This prevents power surges that might occur if both reheats were to
be energized at the same time. This point defaults to 1.0 minute.

3.6.3 VALVE CONTROL

There are two types of PI valve control provided by the SBC-VAV: pulse width modulated control and time
based ramp control. Pulse width modulation allows you to utilize a pulse width driven motor valve. The
SBC-VAV uses a PI control loop to calculate the percent of control needed. The controller then provides
the equivalent power pulse.

Valve control operates on a reverse acting ramp for hot water reheat operations. When the temperature
falls (negative to the controlling setpoint, the valve will move to a more open position. When the
temperature begins to rise, the valve will move to a more closed position.

In chilled water applications, the valve operates in a normal acting ramp. When the temperature rises
(positive to the controlling setpoint), the valve is driven in a positive direction (more open). When the
temperature begins to drop, the valve is driven to a more closed position.

This control loop operates on the basis of the travel time for the valve in use. Full travel time will result in
the valve being driven to its maximum open or closed position, depending on the direction of travel
requested. Figure 3-15 illustrates both valve ramps.

The Valve Control attributes control the optional hot water reheat or chilled water cooling support in
terminal boxes. This attribute provides closed loop proportional plus integral (PI) control.

Attribute FA0x;ST is Valve Status. The options are off, open, close, and calibrate

Attribute FA0x;VU is Valve Use. The options are disabled, cooling and heating.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-47

AUXILIARY SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Attribute FA0x;VM is Valve Mode. The options are Pulse Width Modulation and Floating Point Motor
Control.

Attribute FA0x;VA is Actual Valve Position. It shows the actual valve position (in percent) based on travel
time. This point is read only.

Attribute FA0x;VD is Desired Valve Position. It shows the desired valve position with which the loop should
control the valve to bring the measured input variable closer to the setpoint. A change in VD causes the
valve to drive in the proper control direction. If AM = 0, then VD can be set manually by a host.

Attribute FA0x;UT is Update Threshold. The desired valve position is not updated until it differs from the
actual valve position by at least the amount specified by Update Threshold. The desired positions of 0%
and 100% are not subject to the threshold requirement. This attribute is used to minimize the actuation of
the value for insignificant changes.

Attribute FA0x;RI is Recalibrate Interval. It shows the amount of time, from 1 to 255 hours, between valve
recalibrations. You can recalibrate the valve position by setting the valve in the closed direction for the full
travel time then restoring it to the desired position. Valve Motor Travel Time (VT) must equal some

Valve Valve
Position Position

VP VP
hot water valve
chill water valve
proportional band
proportional band

maximum maximum
valve valve
position position
re
ve
rs

p
e

m
ac

ra
tin

g
g

tin
ra

ac
m
p

al
rm
no

higher
lower
temp
temp

damper control CH - valve control VO damper control CC + valve control VO

Figure 3-15: Reverse and Normal Valve Ramps

value greater than 0 for RI to be considered valid by the controller. When calibration occurs, the SBC-VAV
drives the valve closed for VT + 10 seconds of time. Once calibrated the controller drives the valve to VD
(desired valve) position. Calibration is disabled when you set RI to 0. This point defaults to 0.

NOTE
If RI = 0 and a power failure occurs, the
valve will not be recalibrated upon power-
up. RI must be set > 0 for a recalibration to
occur.

3-48 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES AUXILIARY

Attribute FA0x;VO is Valve Offset. It is added to CC or subtracted from HC for calculation of the loop
setpoint. If the SBC-VAV is configured for hot water control, then VO is subtracted from HC. If the SBC-
VAV is configured for chilled water control, then VO is added to CC.

Attribute FA0x;VP is Valve Proportional Band. It specifies the input variable range, in degrees (0.0 to 25.5),
over which the output value is proportional to the error value. The proportional band is offset from the
setpoint for the loop. This point defaults to 5.0.

Attribute FA0x;VI is Valve Integration Constant. It shows the amount of proportional error history (0 to
25.5%) used to calculate the desired position for the valve and to create an accumulated integral sum. This
integral sum, applied once per minute, is used to control overshoot while the loop is operating within the
confines of the proportional band. This point defaults to 0.0.

The P+I control loop controls the amount of integral (integral sum) that is accumulated through the use of
an antireset windup strategy. When the control loop reaches its maximum (maximum valve position) or its
minimum (minimum valve position), the integral sum is dumped. Integral will begin to calculate again when
the control is once more within the proportional band.

Attribute FA0x;VT is Valve Motor Travel Time. It shows the amount of time, in seconds, that it takes the
valve motor to travel when moving from a fully closed position to a full open position (0–100%). The SBC-
VAV uses this time to determine the motor position when called for by the valve control PI. The maximum
setting for this point is 3,000 seconds.

Attribute FA0x;PP is Pulse Duration Period. It shows the amount of time, in seconds, during which the
valve is to be pulsed ON or pulse width modulation is enabled. For example if PP = 100 seconds and the
SBC-VAV is calling for 40% heat, then the valve is pulsed on for 40 seconds and then remains off for 60
seconds (a total of PP seconds). The output will continue to be pulsed on for 40 seconds every full travel
period of 100 seconds. This will last as long as 40% output control is called for by the control loop. This
attribute defaults to 0 seconds.

Attribute FA0x;TL is DAT Low Temp Lockout. It defines the minimum source/duct temperature below which
cooling will be disengaged. This offers protection against freeze-up. Cooling stages will be energized only
if there is a reliable source/duct temperature above this setting.

Attribute FA0x;TH is DAT High Temp Lockout. It defines the maximum source/duct temperature above
which heating will be disengaged. This offers protection against overheating. Heating stages will be
energized only if there is a reliable source/duct temperature below this setting.

NOTE
If a supply temperature sensor does not
exist, set both TL and TH to 999.0. When TL
and TH are set to 999.0, the valve control
will not look for a supply temperature.

Attribute FA0x;CD is Change Valve Direction. It is used to set the direction of the Valve outputs. When the
attribute is set to 0, the direction is normal with an increase signal on FB02 and a decrease signal on
FB03. With the attribute set to 1, the outputs are reversed.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-49

AUXILIARY SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Attribute FA0x;AM is Auto/Manual Mode. It selects the control mode for the valve output(s). If AM = 0
(Manual), then the valve position can be set by manually changing VD to the desired position. You can do
this through the use of a PUP network program. If AM = 1 (Automatic), then the valve position is set by the
control loop.

3.6.4 PID CONTROL

The Analog control of the SBC-VAV is a general purpose PID loop used to control the analog output.

Proportional+Integral+Derivative (PID) represents a method of control that controls equipment according

to a setpoint in proportion to the value of a measured variable. It accounts for the amount of error
(difference between the measured variable and the setpoint) and the continued presence of error. You can
use PID control in the analog output loop by enabling the Control Enable attribute (CE = 1). Setting CE = 0
disables PID control.

Attribute FA11;SP is Loop Setpoint. It specifies the desired loop setpoint. In PID control, the setpoint is
defined in SP. The measured input variable is the analog sensor referenced by the universal input
specified in IC. The setpoint is expressed in the same kind of measurement units (engineering units) that
the measured variable uses (e.g., degrees, cfm, inches of WC, etc.). For example, when using the analog
control attributes to adjust cooling dampers to control a temperature value that the input sensor measures
(in degrees), you must express the setpoint for the analog control in degrees. The data type of SP is the
same as the data type of the selected measured variable. This value is used with the unoccupied setup/
setback and the reset to calculate CS.

Attribute FA11;CS is Calculated Control Setpoint. It shows the actual loop control setpoint. This read-only
point reflects the unoccupied setup/setback as well as any reset and/or SBC-STAT setpoint adjustment.
This point is expressed in the same kind of measurement units (engineering units) that the measured
variable uses (e.g., degrees, cfm, inches of WC, etc.). The data type of CS is the same as the data type of
the selected measured variable.

Attribute FA11;PO is Percent Output Value. This attribute shows the output value in hundredths of a
percent (e.g., 75.00%). The value is calculated based on the error, change in error and past error for the
control loop. The point is then scaled to the selected engineering units of the analog output and is stuffed
into the AO attribute as well as into CV of the analog output. This point can be set manually if the control
loop is disabled (CE = 0).

Attribute FA11;AO is Analog Output Value. It shows the scaled output value used by the analog output and
is a reflection of the Analog Output attribute CV. This point is the PO value scaled to UI1 MN and UI1 MX
of the corresponding analog output AO. You can write to attribute AO when the Analog Output attribute
AM = 0.

Attribute FA11;IN is Measured Variable's Value. It is read only and displays the value of the input selected
in IC.

3-50 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES AUXILIARY

Attribute FA11;IC is Loop Measured Variable. It specifies the input to be used for the control loop’s
measured variable. A value of 0 in IC disables the control loop. A nonzero value selects one of the inputs.
A list of the available measured variable inputs appears in Table 3-15.

Table 3-15: Control Loop Measured Variables Using IC

Measured
Value of IC
Variable

disabled
0
(default)

1 Zone Temp

2 Supply Temp

3 Flow

4 UI1

5 UI2

9 Zone Heating

10 Zone Cooling

Outside Air
11 Temperature
(OAT)

Attribute FA11;MR is Maximum Amount to Reset Setpoint. It specifies the maximum amount needed to
reset the loop setpoint (SP) based on when reset is being used. Attribute CS takes into account the use of
the maximum reset specified in MR.

NOTE
The data type of MR is the same as the data
type of the referenced input variable
specified by IC.

Attribute FA11;RC is Reset Variable's Value. It displays the value of the input selected in RV.

Attribute FA11;RV is Reset Variable. It specifies the input to be used for calculating the reset used by the
control loop. A value of 0 disables reset. A nonzero value selects one of the inputs. The reset variable can
be any one of the values specified in Table 3-16. This point provides the ability to control a loop using one
input while resetting the loop using a different input.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-51

AUXILIARY SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Table 3-16: Available Inputs for Control Loop Reset Variable RV

Value of RV Reset Variable

disabled
0
(default)

1 Zone Temp

2 Supply Temp

3 Flow

4 UI1

5 UI2

Outside Air
11 Temperature
(OAT)

Attribute FA11;RS is the Setpoint at Which Reset Action Begins. This attribute specifies the value at which
the reset action begins. When the value of the reset variable exceeds RS, reset action will be used in
determining the calculated setpoint. Just as SP is the proportional control setpoint for MV, RS is the reset
control setpoint for the value of the reset variable selected by RV. The data type of RS is the same as the
data type of the reset variable specified by RV.

Attribute FA11;RL is Limit for Maximum Reset. It specifies the value at which maximum reset is used.
When the value of the reset variable is equal to RL, the maximum reset (MR) is used in determining the
calculated setpoint.

The relationship between RL and RS, as well as the sign (+ or -) of MR, determines how changes in the
reset variable RV affect the setpoint of the loop SP. Refer to Figure 3-16.

3-52 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES AUXILIARY

1
SP+MR

RL<RS
MR>0

SP
RC

RL RS

2
SP+MR

RL>RS
MR>0
SP
RC

RS RL

RS RL
SP
RC
RL>RS
MR<0

SP-MR

RL RS

RC
SP

RL<RS
MR<0

SP-MR

4
Figure 3-16: Four Forms of Reset Action

NOTE
The data types returned for attributes RS
and RL are determined by the data type of
the referenced reset variable specified by
RV.

NOTE
It may not be possible to use a negative
value for MR if the data type of the control
loop’s input IC uses an unsigned data type.

Attribute FA11;DB is Deadband. It specifies the deadband within the proportional control band in which the
output remains constant at a point midway between maximum output and minimum output. By specifying a
DB that is greater than or equal to the resolution of the sensor specified in IC, you eliminate the possibility
of cycling around the setpoint. The value of DB should never exceed the proportional band PB. If DB is
greater than PB, then the control loop will not have proportional control.

The attribute FA11;DB relates to the resolution of the input variable of the control loop. Recall that the
range of a 16-bit, analog input is scaled into 65,535 equal divisions. The SBC-VAV can recognize input
changes that are greater than or equal to the resolution of each of the divisions. For linear analog input

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-53

AUXILIARY SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

devices having a large operational range, the size of each division is also relatively large. For a linear
analog input device having a relatively small operational range, the size of each division is relatively small.

In the case of nonlinear sensors such as thermistors, the resolution of each division becomes more
irregular as the temperature range extends to the outer limits of the operational range. At these outer limits
of the sensor’s operation range, one small division may represent a very large or very small temperature
range because of the nonlinear nature of the sensor’s response curve. The incidence of this phenomenon
is even more pronounced with the use of an 8-bit analog input sensor.
Whether or not the divisions of a particular sensor represent a relatively large or relatively small number, it
is important to realize that if the setpoint (SP) chosen does not exactly fall on one of these divisions, the
SBC-VAV will never attain the setpoint. The resulting control action will be an oscillation of the output
around the setpoint. In order to eliminate the effects of this hunting action, a deadband can be
programmed that is centered on the selected setpoint.

Attribute FA11;DB is used to specify an input variable range within the proportional band PB. The size of
DB should be based on the type of sensor input selected for the input specified in IC. When the value of
the measured variable is within this deadband, the output signal remains constant at the midpoint of the
minimum/maximum range.

The point DB is centered on the setpoint SP to create the actual control deadband. When the value of the
control variable (specified by IC) is within ±DB/2 of the setpoint SP, the SBC-VAV assumes that it has
reached the setpoint.

65,535 divisions
over sensor 65,535
range sample divisions
linear over sensor sample
response range nonlinear
response

~ ~
~

~ ~
~

~
~

0 0
~
~

resolution of
~
~

resolution of
sensor value resolution for sensor value
equal sensor MX MN nonlinear sensors
MN MX
resolution for is irregular at ends
linear response of response curve

Figure 3-17: Sensor Resolution for Linear and Nonlinear Devices

3-54 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES AUXILIARY

PB

Output

Max

DB

Min

Control Loop
Variable

SP
SP-PB/2 SP-DB/2 SP+DB/2 SP+PB/2

Figure 3-18: Normal Acting, Proportional Control Output Response Showing a Deadband Centered
Around the Setpoint (SP)

By entering a value in FA11;DB that is greater than the resolution of the measured variable sensor, you
create a deadband that allows the SBC-VAV to effectively reach setpoint.

Be sure that the DB selected does not exceed the size of the proportional band (PB). The attribute DB is
expressed in the same kind of measurement units (engineering units) that the measured variable uses
(e.g., degrees, cfm, inches W.C., etc.). The data type of DB is the same as the data type of the selected
measured variable. The point DB defaults to 0.

NOTE
The data types returned for attributes DB
and PB are determined by the data type of
the referenced measured variable specified
by IC.

CAUTION
Never change DB to a value greater than
half of the proportional band PB. Doing so
will eliminate the effects of PID control,
resulting in on/off control.

At this point, the SBC-VAV will provide simple closed loop feedback proportional control. This means that
the actual measured performance of the control (from the measured variable input) is fed back to the

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-55

AUXILIARY SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

controller and is compared with the effective setpoint for the loop. Any difference between the actual value
of the measured variable (let’s call this MV) and effective setpoint values is called error (MV CS).

An analogy is helpful in explaining the effects of error. Figure 3-19 shows a simple lever and fulcrum. A
change in the lever position on the error side produces a proportional change in the lever on the output
side. Depending on the position of the fulcrum, a change on the error side will have a greater or lesser
effect on the output side. The fulcrum position changes the ratio of error to output.

OL

Error Output

Fulcrum

OH

Figure 3-19: Input/Output Ratio

One problem with proportional only control is the changes in loop performance that occur when the
condition being measured by the input sensor changes (e.g., the measured temperature changes when a
door is opened and the room or space is flooded with cold air). As the loop environment changes, the
proportional only control loop begins to cycle around an offset from the setpoint. Figure 3-20 illustrates the
performance of a typical loop under proportional only control.

Figure 3-20: Proportional Only Control

Attribute FA11;PB is Proportional Band. It specifies the input variable range over which the output value is
proportional to the error value (i.e., changes in the measured variable result in proportional changes in the
output signal). The proportional band is centered around setpoint for the loop. This point is expressed in
the same kind of measurement units (engineering units) that the measured variable uses—for example:
degrees, cfm, inches W.C. The data type of PB is the same as the data type of the selected measured
variable

3-56 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES AUXILIARY

NOTE
The data type of PB is the same as the data
type of the referenced input variable
specified by IC.

To determine PB, first decide how closely the SBC-VAV must control the output to the setpoint. For
instance, if the setpoint is 72F, then an acceptable control range might be within two degrees of the
setpoint. This control range can be expressed as a band centered on the setpoint: from 70to 74, or 4
degrees—the proportional band (PB). Refer to Figure 3-21 and Figure 3-22.

Output
Position

Max

Min

Input
Variable

SP - PB/2 SP SP + PB/2

PB

Figure 3-21: Proportional Band for Normal Acting Control (SG = 0)

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-57

AUXILIARY SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Output
Position

Max

Min

Input
Variable

SP - PB/2 SP + PB/2
SP

PB

Figure 3-22: Proportional Band for Reverse Acting Control (SG = 1)

For normal acting control loops, PO is set to maximum output when the input variable equals the setpoint
plus half of the proportional band (SP + PB/2). The point PO is set to minimum output when the input
variable equals the setpoint minus half of the proportional band (SP + PB/2). These associations are
reversed for reverse acting control loops.

Attribute FA11;RP is Reset Period. This attribute specifies the reset period (in seconds) over which the
error history is accumulated. If RP = 10 seconds with a constant error of 2.0, then the error history would
increase by 0.2 every second. In five seconds, the error history would be 1.0. At the end of ten seconds,
the error history would be 2.0. Setting RP to 0 disables integral action. The longer RP is, the less effect it
has on the control response. Figure 3-23 shows the response of a typical control loop when integral action
is used in addition to proportional action (PI control). A value of 0 disables the reset period.

Figure 3-23: Proportional + Integral (PI) Control

At the start-up of the loop or following a change in setpoint (see Figure 3-24), the error is fairly large.
Proportional action causes the loop output to accelerate toward the setpoint. However by the time the loop
response reaches the setpoint value, it has gained inertia from the preceding proportional action. This
causes the loop to overshoot the setpoint. As the loop exceeds the setpoint moving toward its first peak,
the error sum is accumulating. This slows down the acceleration, eventually causing the downturn in
response.

3-58 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES AUXILIARY

As the error falls and then drops below the setpoint, the error sum will be reduced because now the error is
in the opposite direction. The cycle continues in diminishing peaks until it finally converges at the setpoint.

The proportional control action of the loop has a major effect on integral action. Increasing PB results in a
smaller integral effect for a given value of RP. In general, decreasing the proportional band PB will
increase the amount of overshoot. On the other hand, the larger PB is, the slower the loop response.

Several important factors may not be obvious to inexperienced users of these DDC techniques.

First, whenever the error falls outside of the proportional band—that is, PB/2 from the setpoint, two
important things happen: the controller’s output is fully pegged in the appropriate direction, and the error
sum stops accumulating. The control produces its maximum output because it must bring the error within
the proportional band again. The error sum is accumulating so that it does not “wind up” a massive error
sum that would take many control cycles to dissipate. This feature is called antireset windup.

Antireset windup also makes the loop recover quickly when it reenters the proportional band. Another
feature of antireset windup is that the error history is limited to PB/2 because that is all that required to
produce maximum output. Additional error accumulation would only slow down loop recovery.

To quicken loop response while eliminating overshoot, derivative action must be taken. Derivative action
takes into account the rate of change in error and allows the SBC-VAV to counter the effects of the error’s
rate of change on the control output. To find the change in error, subtract the current error (read every
second by the PID loop) from the previous second’s error. A percentage of this change (specified by RT)
becomes the derivative contribution to the PID output.

Attribute FA11;RT is Derivative Rate. It specifies a percentage of change in error that is to be used in
calculating PO. The value is specified in percent per second. The point RT can have any value from 0.0 to
25.5%/second. The effect of adding derivative action to the output response appears in Figure 3-24.

PB Error SP

TIME

-
Figure 3-24: Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PID) Control

Attribute FA04;SG is Control Action. It specifies the control action for the control loop. When SG = 0
(normal), a positive error causes an increase in output. When SG = 1 (reverse), a positive error causes a
decrease in output. This point determines the response of the loop output to the kind of error. If the output
action is to be increased (toward max) when the error is positive (MV > SP), set SG to normal (0). If the
output action is to be decreased (toward min) for positive error, set SG to reverse (1). (Attribute SG is also
used during schedule control to determine whether SU is added to SP [SG = 0] or subtracted from SP [SG
= 1] during unoccupied periods.) For more information, refer to attribute SU.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-59

AUXILIARY SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Proportional only control produces cycling, and its performance changes when the measured environment
changes. The way to eliminate cycling and to compensate for load changes is to use integral action, the I
part for PID control.

Rather than responding exclusively to the loop error from moment to moment as is the case with
proportional action, integral action is based on a summation of the error that has occurred over some
period. This error sum is used to reset, or modify, the response of the control loop (output) based on a
running average of the error. The amount of time over which the error averaging is accumulated is called
the reset period.

Attribute FA11;SU is Unoccupied SetUp/Setback. This point specifies the amount to add (if SG = 0) or
subtract (if SG = 1) from the setpoint during an unoccupied period. The adjusted setpoint will be displayed
in CS. The attribute CS (the effective setpoint incorporates any setup/setback that may exist as well as any
reset or setpoint adjustment from the SBC-STAT. The data type of the value specified in SU is the same as
the data type of the referenced measured variable specified by IC.

Attribute FA11;CE is Enable Control Loop. It enables the PID loop. When CE = 0, PO is not updated but
may be set manually. When CE = 1, PO is updated by the PID control loop and if the analog output is set
to automatic control, the AO value will be set accordingly.

3.6.5 OCCUPANCY DETECTOR

The Occupancy Detector attributes allow you to define the circumstances under which the SBC-VAV will
automatically switch to an extended occupied mode during unoccupied periods when occupancy detector
is used with the controller.

Attribute FC01;MS is Occupancy Status. This read-only point shows the status of the occupancy detector
digital input. To enable occupancy detection, MT must be > 0 and UI1 MUST be configured as digital (UI1
ST = 0). If either of these two conditions are not met, MS will display 0. When this point is enabled (MS =
1) and when occupancy in the zone is detected during unoccupied periods, the occupancy input extends
occupancy time by the amount specified in MT.

Attribute FC01;IC is Status Input. It enables occupancy detection (IC = 1) and specifies the binary input
channel to be used for detection. This point uses a nonzero value from UI1 to indicate occupancy.

Attribute FC01;MD is Extended Occupancy Delay. It sets the amount of time, in seconds, during which the
occupancy detector must remain on before the occupancy detector will override the zone. This prevents
false triggers that might occur as others pass quickly through the zone.

Attribute FC01;MT is Extended Occupancy Duration. It defines, in minutes, the length of time needed to
override the zone whenever occupancy is detected.

Attribute FC01;MR is Extended Occupancy Remaining. This read-only point displays the time remaining
for occupancy detector override.

3.6.6 RELATIVE HUMIDITY

Beginning with v4.08 firmware, this family of devices can accept a single SBC-RHT sensor to monitor both
temperature and humidity from a single thermostat. This application is valid only for single STAT sensor
applications, and does not support multi-networking.

Attribute FE00;RH is Relative Humidity. This read-only point reflects the current sensed relative humidity
from the space/zone from a connected SBC-RHT thermostat.

3-60 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES AUXILIARY

Attribute FE00;HD is Display Relative Humidity Mode. It defines whether or not relative humidity should be
displayed on the LCD of a connected SBC-RHT thermostat.

Attribute FE00;HC is Relative Humidity Correction. It defines a correction offset to the measured relative
humidity in the space/zone; providing a means to calibrate and adjust the sensed reading if necessary.

Attribute FE00;HO is Override Relative Humidity. It defines the ability to override the current sensed
relative humidity for testing purposes when necessary.

Table 3-17 Auxiliary Attributes

attr description

Auxiliary:
Fan
FB01

FO Fan/Damper Mode—used to configure the fan or damper.

Fan Setpoint—used to set the parallel fan, induction damper or constant

FS
volume setpoint (cfm).

Series Fan Unoccupied Mode—shows the status of the series fan during the
SF
unoccupied schedule state.

Minimum Cycle Time—shows the minimum amount of time, in minutes,

FC
during which the fan output will stay energized or de-energized.

CV Fan—defines the status of the fan output.

Auxiliary:
Electric
Reheat
FA03

Reheat Mode— used to configure the SBC-VAV’s outputs for electric reheat.
0 = Disabled
RO 1 = 2 stage electric reheat (K2 and 3)
2 = 2 stage electric reheat (K4 and 5)
3 = 4 stage electric reheat (K2,3,4, and 5)

Stage Requiring Flow—defines by the appropriate bit setting which of the

FR
available reheat stages requires a positive flow indication.

AV Available Stages—displays the stages that are currently for use.

Energized Stages—displays those reheat stages that are currently

EN
energized.

Require Max Airflow—if set to “Yes” (AF = 1), this holds off the addition of
AF
reheat stages until the PID loop is calling for maximum airflow.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-61

AUXILIARY SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Table 3-17 Auxiliary Attributes

attr description

Max Supply Temp—establishes a maximum supply duct temperature above

MX
which the reheats will deenergize.

Balance Stage usage—if set to “Yes” (BA = 1), this attribute considers the
BA Run Hour Totals (FB0x;RH) for the individual triac outputs in energizing
reheat stages.

Reheat Offset— specifies, in degrees, the offset from the calculated heating
OF control setpoint (FE00;HC) that determines the temperature below which
additional reheat stages can be energized.

Stage Delay—shows the minimum amount of time, in minutes, before the

ID
next reheat stage will be energized.

Auxiliary:
Valve
Control
FA08 and
FA09

ST Valve Status—indicates the status of the valve channel.

VU Valve Use—options are disabled, cooling and heating.

Valve Mode—options are Pulse Width Modulation and Floating Point Motor
VM
Control.

VA Actual Valve Position—shows the actual valve position based on travel time.

Desired Valve Position—shows the desired valve position at which the loop
VD should control the valve in order to bring the measured input variable closer
to the setpoint.

Update Threshold—used to minimize the actuation of the valve for

UT
insignificant changes.

Valve Recalibrate Interval—shows the amount of time between valve

RI
recalibrations.

VO Valve Offset—used to configure the valve mode.

Valve Proportional Band—specifies the input variable range, in degrees (0.0

VP
to 25.5), over which the output is proportional to the error value.

Valve Integration Constant—shows the amount of proportional error history

VI
(0 to 100%) used to calculate the desired position for the valve.

Valve Travel Time—shows the amount of time, in seconds, that it takes the
VT
valve motor to travel from a fully closed position to a fully opened one.

Pulse Duration Period—shows the amount of time, in seconds, that the valve
PP
is to be pulsed ON when PE = 1 or pulse width modulation is enabled.

3-62 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES AUXILIARY

Table 3-17 Auxiliary Attributes

attr description

Low Temp Lockout—offers protection against freeze-up. If a supply

TL
temperature sensor is not present, set this attribute to 999.0.

High Temp Lockout—heating stages will energize if only if there is a reliable

TH source/duct temperature below this setting. If a supply temperature sensor is
not present, set this attribute to 999.0.

CD Change Valve Direction—used to set the direction of the valve outputs.

AM Auto/Manual—selects the control mode for the valve output(s).

Auxiliary:
PID Control
FA11

SP Loop Setpoint—specifies the desired loop setpoint.

CS Control Setpoint—shows the actual loop control setpoint.

PO Percent Output—shows the output value in hundredths of a percent.

Analog Output Current Value—shows the scaled output value used by the
AO
analog output.

IN Input Channel Value—displays the value of the input selected in IC.

Input Channel—specifies the input to be used for the measured variable for
the control loop.
0 = disabled
1 = Zone Temp
2 = Supply Temp
IC
3 = Flow
4 = UI1
5 = UI2
9 = Zone Heating
10 = Zone Cooling

Maximum Reset—specifies the maximum amount by which to reset the loop

MR
setpoint (SP) when reset is being used.

RC Reset Variable Value—displays the value of the input selected in RV.

Reset Variable—specifies the input to be used for calculating the reset.

0=disabled
1 = Zone Temp
RV 2 = Supply Temp
3 = Flow
4 = UI1
5 = UI2

RS Reset Setpoint—specifies the value at which the reset action begins.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-63

AUXILIARY SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Table 3-17 Auxiliary Attributes

attr description

RL Reset Limit—specifies the value at which maximum reset is used.

Deadband—specifies the input variable range over which the output value is
DB
proportional to the error value.

Proportional Band—specifies the input variable range over which the output
PB
value is proportional to the error value.

Reset Period— specifies the reset period (in seconds) over which the error
RP
history is accumulated.

Rate—specifies a percentage of change in error that is to be used in

RT
calculating PO.

SG Control Sign—specifies the control action for the control loop.

SetUp/Setback—specifies the amount to add (if SG = 0) or subtract (if SG =

SU
1) from the setpoint during an unoccupied period.

CE Control Enabled—enables the PID loop.

Auxiliary:
Occupancy
Detector
FC01

Occupancy Detector Input Status—shows the status of the occupancy

MS
detector digital input.

Occupancy Detector Enable—uses a nonzero value from UI1 to indicate

IC
occupancy.

Extended Occupancy Delay—sets the amount of time, in seconds, during

MD which the occupancy detector must remain on before it will override the
zone.

Extended Occupancy Duration—defines, in minutes, the length of time to

MT
override the zone whenever occupancy is detected.

MR Extended Occupancy Remainingc

Auxiliary:
Relative
Humidity
FE00

Relative Humidity—reflects the current sensed humidity from the zone/

RH
space.

Display Relative Humidity—defines whether or not relative humidity should

HD
be displayed on the connected SBC-RHT’s LCD display.

3-64 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES AUXILIARY

Table 3-17 Auxiliary Attributes

attr description

Relative Humidity Correction—defines a correction offset to apply against

HC
the measured humidity from the space/zone.

Override Relative Humidity—defines a means to override the sensed

HO
humidity for testing.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-65

I/O SETUP SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

3.7 I/O SETUP

The following are Input/Output Setup attributes:
FE0x;CV, RE, ST, DT, MN, MX, LL, HL, HS, AS, AE, SU, IP, IF, and OI.
FD01;CV, DT, MN, MX, LS, HS, and AM.
FB0x;CV, OP, RH, RL, and OI.

3.7.1 UNIVERSAL INPUTS (UI1, UI2 and UI3)

I/O Setup offers specific operational options. It provides you with options to use either UI1 or UI2 for one of
several SBC-VAV features. It can be used for the duct temperature input, as a proof of flow input, as an
analog control PID input or as an occupancy detection input of the SBC-VAV. When FE0x is used as a duct
temperature sensor input, energy totalization can be internally calculated and updated by the SBC-VAV.
As a digital input, UI1 can be used as a proof of flow input safeguarding electric reheats when air flow is
not present. When used as an occupancy detection sensor input, UI1 can be dedicated to the SBC-VAV
occupancy detection feature—allowing for automatic unoccupied override. This sends the SBC-VAV into
an occupied mode of operation when occupancy is detected in the control area. Each use precludes the
use of the input for other functions. For instance if the input is used for occupancy detection, energy
totalization/autowarm-up mode and proof of flow are disabled.

UI3 on the SBC-VAV controller is exclusively used for the controller’s Indoor Air Quality feature, where a
CO2 sensor must be connected to the input. If you are not using the SBC-VAV’s Indoor Air Quality feature,
you may still use UI3 as an extra Universal Input for other general purposes.

Attribute FE0x;CV is Current Value. It shows the current value of UI1. This attribute is read-only unless
overridden (OI = 1).

Attribute FE0x;RE is Data Reliability and can be either a 0 or 1. It is set to 1 if the universal input is
questionable. The digital input is considered unreliable during the input filtering delay time. Any time the
digital input changes state (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0), it is considered questionable. If the digital input
remains stable (does not change state) for IF seconds, the corresponding bit in RE is set back to 0—
indicating a reliable/stable value. If the digital input does change state before IF seconds expire, the
reliability bit remains set to 1—indicating that the change of state may be a digital input bounce.

Attribute FE0x;ST is Sensor Type. Through this point, you can select one of the following input types:
digital, linear (scaled MN to MX), 4–20mA linear (scaled MN to MX), or thermistor (-22.0 to 122.0F). The
associated settings appear in Table 3-18.

Table 3-18: Sensor Types for FE0x

Value of ST Sensor Type

ST = 0 digital

full scale, linear input

ST = 2 scaled from MN to MX (0–
10VDC)

4–20mA input scaled from

ST = 3
MN to MX

3-66 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES I/O SETUP

Table 3-18: Sensor Types for FE0x

Value of ST Sensor Type

-22.0 to 122.0F
ST = 7 (-30.0 to 50.0C)
thermistor (default)

When ST = 0, the universal input will be configured to operate as a digital input and will allow CV to display
a 1 or a 0—the meaning of which is dependent on IP (input polarity). If IP = 0, a low voltage input (<
2.5VDC) to the universal input will result in CV = 0; a high voltage (> 2.5VDC) applied to the universal input
will result in CV = 1. If IP = 1, a low voltage applied to the universal input will read as CV = 1; a high voltage
will result in CV = 0.

Setting ST to 2 and having the SBC-VAV set up to use the appropriate hardware input provides the ability
to use a 0–10VAC device as the input. The minimum and maximum values of the range are set in
attributes MN and MX. For example if the input value is to be displayed as a percentage, then set ST = 2,
MN = 0 and MX = 0 (0–100%). The SBC-VAV will determine the voltage input converted internally to raw
counts, will scaled the raw counts (0–255) across the range 0–100 and will display the value of the input as
a range of 0–100. For linear voltage devices, be sure that there is no jumper on the UI1 row of pins on the
IVR pin terminal block. Section 2: Wiring and Installation.

The following sample calculation shows how the SBC-VAV scales raw counts on the 10-bit UI1 using a
current value of 115. (The result is rounded.)

Current Counts MX

CV = MN +
Max Counts

CV = 0.00 + 115 100

65,535

CV = 0.00 + 11500
65,535

CV = 0.18

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-67

I/O SETUP SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

The following sample calculation shows how the SBC-VAV scales raw counts on the 10-bit input using a
current value of 185 counts.

CV = MN Current Counts MX)

Max Counts

CV = 0.0 185  100

65,535

CV = 0.0 + 18500
65,535

CV = 0.28

If the input’s value was 185 in raw counts according to the percentage scaling of MN and MX, then the
value of 0.25 (rounded) would be displayed in CV.

If you make the value of MN greater than the value of MX, the input is configured for reverse scaling. This
is useful for 5–0VDC sensors (as opposed to 0–5VDC sensors).

The SBC-VAV also provides linear input scaling for 4–20mA current transmitters (ST = 3). For sensors that
provide a 4–20mA signal, set ST = 3. Attributes MN and MX are used in the same way as they are for ST
= 2.

Set ST = 7 if using a thermistor. For information on hardware settings, refer to Section 2: Wiring and
Installation.

3-68 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES I/O SETUP

Analog Input Displayed Values

Range (Counts)

Full Scale
0-5 VDC 4-20 mA 0-20 mA Thermistor
ST=2 ST=3 ST=2 -22.0˚F or
MX MX MX -30.0˚C
65535

229.5

204

178.5

43176
52428 Divisions
153 Divisions

65535 127.5
Count 65535 65535
Divisions Divisions
Window

102

76.5

51

25.5

0
MN MN MN 122.0˚F
OR
50.0˚C

Figure 3-25: Analog Sensor Types

Attribute DT is PUP Data type for Input. It specifies the PUP data type for the input. The data type
determines how certain universal input attributes are displayed. This point affects the display of CV, MN,
MX, SU, LL, HL and HS. Data type codes determine the number of decimal places in the value and
whether or not the value is signed (positive or negative) or unsigned. This attribute defaults to 253 (signed
9.1 digit).

Attribute FE0x;MN is Minimum Scaled Value. It specifies the minimum engineering unit for the input
corresponding to the lowest value measured at the input connection.This point is used to scale the
measured value to meaningful engineering units for display.

Attribute FE0x;MX is Maximum Scaled Value. It specifies the maximum engineering unit for the input
corresponding to the highest value measured at the input connection.This point is used to scale the
measured value to meaningful engineering units for display.

Attributes MN and MX program the minimum and maximum scaled values for linear, analog inputs (ST = 2
and ST = 3). For example if the input value is to be displayed as a percentage, you would set ST = 2, MN
= 0 and MX = 100 (0–100%). The SBC-VAV will scale the raw counts 0–255 for 8-bit inputs across the
range 0–100 and will display the value of the input for a range of 0–100. For linear input devices, be sure
that the appropriate hardware is set on the SBC-VAV. For information on hardware settings, refer to
Section 2: Wiring and Installation.

Attributes LL, HL, HS, AS and SU provide parameters for analog PUP alarming. The AE attribute
determines whether or not input alarming is used.

Attribute FE0x;LL is Low Alarm Limit. It specifies the low alarm limit. If alarms are enabled and the current
value drops below this value, a low limit alarm will be generated.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-69

I/O SETUP SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Attribute FE0x;HL is High Alarm Limit. It specifies the high alarm limit. If alarms are enabled and the
current value rises above this value, a high limit alarm will be generated.

The data types of LL and HL are specified by the data type attribute DT of the universal inputs.

Attribute FE0x;HS is Alarm Limit Hysteresis. It determines when the SBC-VAV returns from a high or low
limit alarm. In the case of a high limit alarm, the CV value must drop below HL - HS to cause a high limit
return. For a low limit alarm, the CV value must rise above LL + HS to cause a low limit return. Figure 3-26
illustrates this concept.

HIGH
LIMIT

High-
HL limit
Alarm

HS
High-
limit
HL-HS
Return
(Normal)

NORMAL

Low-
LL+HS limit
Return
(Normal)

HS

Low-
limit LL
Alarm

LOW
LIMIT

Figure 3-26: Alarm States and Thresholds for Limit Alarming

Attribute FE0x;AS is Alarm Status. It shows the current alarm condition. A value of 0 indicates a normal
condition. A nonzero number indicates alarm generation. Table 3-19 explains each status.

Table 3-19: Values for Alarm Status Attribute

Value of AS Alarm Condition

AS = 0 normal (no alarm)

AS = 1 contact (0  1)

AS = 2 contact (1 0)

AS = 3 change of state

AS = 5 low limit alarm

AS = 6 high limit alarm

Attribute FE0x;AE is Alarm Enable. It specifies the type of alarm checking to be done on the CV value. A
value of 0 indicates that alarming is disabled; a nonzero value selects one of several alarm functions.
Table 3-20 lists the options for AE.

3-70 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES I/O SETUP

Table 3-20: Alarm Enable Options

Alarm Type
Value of AE
Enabled

AE = 0 disabled

contact,
AE = 1
01

contact,
AE = 2
10

change of
AE = 3 state,
10

AE = 4 low limit alarm

AE = 5 high limit alarm

low and high

AE = 6
limit

Attribute FE0x;SU is the Amount to Setup/Setback Alarm Limit. It specifies the amount added to HL or
subtracted from LL during unoccupied periods. The attribute is added to HL defining the unoccupied high-
limit alarm threshold; SU is subtracted from LL defining the unoccupied low-limit alarm threshold.

High-limit CV
Alarm

HL+SU (unocc. high limit)

} HS (unocc. hysteresis)

HL (occ. high limit)

High-limit
Return
} HS (occ. hysteresis)

HS (occ. hysteresis)
Low-limit
Return
} LL (occ. low limit)

} HS (unocc. hysteresis)

LL-SU
Low-limit (unocc. low limit)
Alarm

Figure 3-27: Unoccupied Setup/Setback Alarm Shifting

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-71

I/O SETUP SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Attribute FE0x;IP is Input Polarity. It specifies the input polarity when configured as digital. A value of 0 in
IP indicates that a low voltage displays as CV = 0 and a high voltage displays as CV = 1. A value of 1 in IP
indicates that a low voltage displays as CV = 1, and a high voltage displays as CV = 0.

Attribute FE0x;IF is Input Filter Delay. It specifies the amount of time in tenths of seconds during which an
input configured as digital must remain stable in order for the value to be considered reliable if fluctuations
are not uncommon. This is also the weighted gain if the input is configured as analog. This attribute is
used in the following equation to calculate the average value:

Average Value(Old Value  IF) New Value

IF + 1

Attribute FE0x;IF for digital inputs is determined by the amount of time that the input is in the most recent
change of state. The attribute’s resolution for digital inputs is user adjustable in tenths of seconds. The
default for digital and analog input filtering is 0.0.

Attribute FE0x;OI is Override Input. It allows a host or operator to directly set the value of the source/duct
temperature. This attribute defaults to 0. When it is enabled (OI = 1), you can manually write to CV.

CAUTION
If the Zone Temperature Alarms attribute OI
is enabled and the power to the unit is
removed or lost, you must immediately
rewrite to the Zone Temperature Alarms
attribute CV. The attribute CV will have 00.0
as a reading when power is restored to the
unit. If not corrected, this situation will have a
detrimental effect on the operation of the
unit.

3.7.2 ANALOG OUTPUT (AO1)

Analog Output provides an 8-bit, 0–10VDC output signal. You can control the analog outputs by writing a
value to CV, by having a host controller on the EIA-485 communications network write a value to CV (still
in manual mode) or by automatically controlling the SBC-VAV’s analog control.

Attribute FD01;CV is Current Output Value. It shows the current value for the analog output, any portion of
the 0–10VDC signal. This value may be set manually or automatically. In manual mode (AM = 0), the
analog output is set by an operator or host by changing CV. In automatic mode (AM = 1), the analog
controls are used to set the value. See the PID control subsection in this section for more information.

Attribute FD01;DT is PUP Data type for Output. It specifies the PUP data type for the analog output. The
data type determines how certain analog output attributes are displayed. This point affects the display of
CV, MN and MX. The attribute defaults to 252 (unsigned, 9.1 digit).

3-72 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES I/O SETUP

Attribute FD01;MN is Minimum Scaled Value. It specifies the minimum scaled value for the analog output
corresponding to the lowest value output. This point is used to scale the measured value to meaningful
engineering units for display.

Attribute FD01;MX is Maximum Scaled Value. It specifies the maximum scaled value for the analog output
corresponding to the highest value output. This point is used to scale the measured value to meaningful
engineering units for display.

NOTE
Reverse scaling can be accomplished by
setting MN > MX. The attributes MN and MX
default to 0.00 and 100.0, respectively.

Attribute FD01;LS is Minimum Scaled Voltage. It specifies the actual analog output value for a CV value of
MN.

Attribute FD01;HS is Maximum Scaled Voltage. It specifies the actual analog output value for a CV value
of MX.

Attributes LS and HS specify a range of the total output signal that is then scaled across MN and MX. The
low and high voltages can range from 0.0VDC to 10.0VDC. Reverse scaling can be accomplished by
setting LS > HS. Attributes LS and HS default to 0.0% and 100.0%, respectively. For example if the analog
output value CV is to be displayed as a percentage (0–100) of a 10VDC output range, then set MN to 0
and MX to 100 (a 0.0%–100.0% display range). Set LS = 0.0% and HS = 100.0% (the full range of the
output signal) because CV = 0 represents 0.0% of the output range CV = 100 represents 100.0% of the
output range. Refer to Figure 3-28.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-73

I/O SETUP SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Output Signal

10 VDC HS=100.00% MX=100

scaled CV
output display
range range

0 VDC LS=0.00% MN=0

Figure 3-28: Analog Output Example 1

Attributes MN and MX can be adjusted to display the output signal between a particular range other than a
typical 0–100%. Similarly LS and HS may be adjusted if the desired output signal is something other than
the standard 0–10VDC. For example, assume that an actuator requires a 2–10VDC signal to go full stroke.
Further assume that the application requires CV to be displayed as the current voltage (rather than 0%–
100%). In this example, MN = 2.0 and MX = 10.0 to represent the display range of the output signal in
engineering units (2–10VDC). Attribute LS would be set to 20% (20%  10VDC range = 2VDC minimum
signal) and HS would be set to 100% (100%  10VDC range = 10VDC maximum signal). Refer to Figure
3-29.

3-74 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES I/O SETUP

Output Signal

10 VDC HS=100.00% MX=100

scaled CV
output display
range range

2 VDC
LS=20.00%
MN=2.00
(2 VDC)

0 VDC

Figure 3-29: Analog Output Example 2

Attribute FD01;AM is Automatic/Manual Control. It selects the control mode for the analog output. If AM =
0 (Manual), then CV must be set manually to the desired value by changing CV. If AM = 1 (Automatic),
then CV is set by the corresponding analog control loop. (Control loop FA04 controls FD01.)

3.7.3 RELAY OUTPUTS

Attribute FB0x;CV is Current Value. This point reflects the current requested state of the output as
determined by the output control.

Attribute FB0x;OP is Output Polarity. It is used to define whether the output is normal acting (OP = 0) or
reverse acting (OP = 1). As a normal acting output, the output is off when output control is not calling for
the output to be on. As a reverse acting output, the output is off when the control loop is calling for the
output to be on.

Attribute FB0x;RH is Runtime Hours. It is a time tracking attribute that displays hours and tenths of hours.
The point reflects the amount of time that the output is actually allowing the fan to run as determined by the
Relay Output attribute OP and the control loop demand. Run hours are stored in EEPROM automatically
at midnight and when the System attribute BU is enabled. Attribute RH is restored with the latest backed
up information upon restoration of power after shut down or power loss. This attribute defaults to 0.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-75

I/O SETUP SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

NOTE
You should perform an attribute back up
(System attribute BU = 1) after clearing the
Relay Output attribute RH. Otherwise the
most recent “stored” value will be restored in
RH after a power loss.

Attribute FB0x;RL is Runtime Limit. It specifies a runtime limit in hours for the output. Once the run hours
for the fan output exceed the runtime limit (RH > RL), the SBC-VAV will generate a runtime limit alarm. To
clear the run limit alarm or to receive another run limit alarm, you MUST set RH to 0.

Attribute FB0x;OI is Override. This attribute overrides the digital output. You can choose from four options:
On (OI = 1) constantly energizes the output; Off (OI = 0) disables the output; Auto (OI = 2) allows for
automatic control; Manual (OI = 3) allows the CV to be directly written to.

Table 3-21 Input/Output Attributes

attr description

I/O:
Universal
Inputs (UI1-
UI2)
FE0x

Current Value—(read-only unless OI = 1) shows the current

CV
value of UI1.

Channel Reliability—can be either a 0 or 1. It is set to 1 if the

universal input is questionable. Any time the digital input changes
state (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0), it is considered questionable. If
the digital input remains stable (does not change state) for IF
RE
seconds, the corresponding bit in RE is set back to 0—indicating
a reliable/stable value. If the digital input does change state
before IF seconds expire, the reliability bit remains set to 1—
indicating that the change of state may be a digital input bounce.

Sensor Type—allows you to select an input type.

0 = digital
ST 2 = full scale, linear input scaled from MN to MX
3 = 4-20mA input scaled from MN to MX
7 = -22.0 to 122.0F thermistor

Datatype for Input—specifies the PUP data type for the input.
DT
The default is 253 (signed 9.1 digit).

Minimum Scaled Value—program the minimum scaled values

MN
for linear, analog inputs.

3-76 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES I/O SETUP

Table 3-21 Input/Output Attributes

attr description

Maximum Scaled Value—program the maximum scaled values

MX
for linear, analog inputs.

Low Alarm Limit—specifies the low alarm limit. If alarms are

LL enabled and the current value drops below this value, a low limit
alarm will be generated.

High Alarm Limit—specifies the high alarm limit. If alarms are

HL enabled and the current value rises above this value, a high limit
alarm will be generated.

Alarm Limit Hysteresis—a value that determines when the

SBC-VAV returns from a high- or low-limit alarm. For a high-limit
HS alarm, the CV must drop below HL - HS to cause a high limit
return. For a low-limit alarm, the CV value must rise above LL +
HS to cause a low limit return.

Alarm Status—shows the current alarm condition.

0 = no alarm
1 = contact (0 to 1)
AS 2 = contact (1 to 0)
3 = change of state
5 = low limit alarm
6 = high limit alarm

Alarm Enable—specifies the type of alarm checking to be done

on the CV value.
0 = disabled
1 = contact (0 to 1)
AE 2 = contact (1 to 0)
3 = changed of state
4 = low limit alarm
5 = high limit alarm
6 = low and high limit

Alarm Limit Setup/Setback—specifies a value that is added to

SU
HL and subtracted from LL during unoccupied periods.

Input Polarity—specifies the input polarity when configured as

digital.
0 = low voltage displays as CV = 0, high voltage displays as CV =
IP
1
1 = low voltage displays as CV = 1, high voltage displays as CV =
0

Input Filtering/Averaging—specifies the amount of time in

tenths of seconds during which an input configured as digital must
IF
remain stable in order for the value to be considered reliable if
fluctuations are not uncommon.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-77

I/O SETUP SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Table 3-21 Input/Output Attributes

attr description

Override Input—enables/disables overriding CV. If OI = 0,

override is disabled and CV displays the value of the input. If OI =
1, the override is enabled and the value of CV can be manually
OI
changed.
0 = disabled
1 = enabled

I/O:
Analog Output
(AO1)
FD01

Current Value—shows the current value for the corresponding

CV
analog output.

Datatype for Input—specifies the PUP data type for the analog
DT output. DT affects the display of CV, MN, and MX. DT defaults to
252 (unsigned, 9.1 digit).

Minimum Value—specifies the minimum scaled value for the

MN
analog output corresponding to the highest value output.

Maximum Value—specifies the maximum scaled value for the

MX
analog output corresponding to the highest value output.

Low Scaled Voltage—specifies the actual analog output value

LS
for a CV value of MN.

High Scaled Voltage—specifies the actual analog output value

HS
for a CV value of MX.

Control Mode—specifies how the analog output is controlled:

AM 0 = manual
1 = automatic

I/O:
Relay Outputs
(K1-K5)
FB0x

CV Current Value—shows the current value for the analog output.

OP Output Polarity—allows you to change the polarity of the output.

Runtime Hours—shows the total amount of time, in hours, during which

RH
the output has been energized.

RL Runtime Limit—specifies a run time limit in hours for the output.

3-78 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES I/O SETUP

Table 3-21 Input/Output Attributes

attr description

Override—overrides the digital output.

0 = Off (default)
OI 1 = On
2 = Auto
3 = Manual

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-79

NETWORKING SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

3.8 NETWORKING
There following are Networking attributes:
FF00;ID, ZN, CP, TP, ER, and U1-U4.
F005;CV and RB.

3.8.1 CONFIGURATION
Attribute FF00;ID is the Unit Number. This value is used to set a unique network address for each
controller connected on a multidrop. Each ID is factory set to the last four digits of the board serial number.
Valid values are 0 to 9999. For example, if the serial number is 100072, the Unit ID is 72. If the serial
number is 498765, the Unit ID is 8765.

Attribute FF00;ZN is Zone Number. The Zone Number (from 0 to 65,535) is used to group controllers
together so that they can be controlled simultaneously. For example you can set a group of controllers to
enter Warm-Up Mode all at the same time. The Zone Number programs a Zone Address. The SBC-VAV
uses this code to decide whether or not a PUP Write Zone Attribute command should be honored by this
unit. This attribute defaults to 0.

Attribute FF00;CP is Communication Speed. It specifies the communication speed (baud rate) at which
devices on the network will communicate. American Auto-Matrix unitary controllers communicate over
EIA-485 networks using PUP. All devices on the same multidrop must have CP set to the same value.
Valid baud rates are as follows: 0=9600, 1=4800, 2=2400, 3=1200, 6=38.4K, 7=19.2K, 8=115.2K and
9=57.6K. This attribute defaults to 0.

Table 3-22: Communication Speed Options

Value of CP Baud Rate

0 9600

1 4800

2 2400

3 1200

6 38.4K

7 19.2K

8 115.2K

9 57.6K

NOTE
In order for a change of CP to take effect,
you must reset the SBC-VAV.

3-80 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES NETWORKING

Attribute FF00;TP is Token Passing Type. This attribute defines the mode for token passing. When a
controller is an Irresponsible Peer it will always return a token to the device that passed it, after performing
any pending transactions. In Full Administrator mode, the token is passed to each unit listed in the Peer
List (FF00;U1 through FF00;U4).

Attribute FF00;ER is Token Recovery. This attribute enables Token Recovery. In a token passing
environment there should always be network activity, but if a token is lost the network will fall silent. If
Token Recovery is enabled, and a token is lost, Full Administrator will detect the condition and initiate a
new token.

Attribute FF00;U1-U4 is Peer Unit Number. This attribute defines the Unit ID of a peer. In Full Administrator
mode, the token is passed to each unit in the Peer List.

Attribute FF00;MS is Trend Master unit number. MS is used in configuring the display of trends from a
SAGE on the lcd display of a STAT3 connected to the This is the unit number of the SAGE area controller
that stores the trend information which will be displayed.

3.8.2 SCHEDULE BROADCAST

The Schedule Broadcast attributes allow the SBC-VAV to receive network schedule information.

Attribute F005;CV is Current Value. It shows the current value of the network broadcast schedule values
received by the SBC-VAV. When RB is enabled, CV is forced into the Main Schedule attribute CV and is
used as the functioning schedule value of the SBC-VAV.

Attribute F005;RB is Receive Broadcast. It enables the SBC-VAV to receive network broadcasts and sets
F900;CV value based on the received value. If RB = 0, then receive broadcast is disabled. If RB = 1, then
the SBC-VAV receives the network value and places it in CV and Main Schedule attribute CV. (This
overrides the schedules of the SBC-VAV, which become ineffective.

Table 3-23 Network Attributes

attr description

Network:
Configuratio
n
FF00

Unit ID—is a unique network address for each controller connected

ID
on a multidrop.

Zone Number—(from 0 to 65,535) is used to group controllers

ZN
together so that they can be controlled simultaneously.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 3-81

NETWORKING SECTION 3: SBC-VAV ATTRIBUTES

Table 3-23 Network Attributes

attr description

Communication Speed—specifies the communication speed (baud

rate) at which devices on the network will communicate.
0=9600
1=4800
2=2400
CP
3=1200
6=38.4K
7=19.2K
8=115.2K
9=57.6K

Token Passing Type—defines the mode for token passing. When a

controller is an Irresponsible Peer it will always return a token to the
TP device that passed it, after performing any pending transactions. In
Full Administrator mode, the token is passed to each unit listed in the
Peer List (FF00;U1 through FF00;U4).

Token Recovery—in a token passing environment there should

always be network activity, but if a token is lost the network will fall
ER
silent. If Token Recovery is enabled, and a token is lost, Full
Administrator will detect the condition and initiate a new token.

U1 Peer Unit Number—defines the Unit ID of a peer. In Full

- Administrator mode, the token is passed to each unit in the Peer List.
U4

Trend Master unit number—specifies the unit ID of the SAGE area

MS controller containing the trend information to be displayed on a
connected STAT3.

Network:
Schedule
Broadcast
F005

Current Value—shows the current value of the network broadcast

CV
schedule values received by the SBC-VAV.

Receive Broadcast—enables the SBC-VAV to receive network

RB
broadcasts and sets F900;CV based on the received value.

3-82 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

 SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION
The SBC-VAV model controllers can provide a wide range of VAV terminal box applications as
well as CAV control. This section covers the configurations for scheduling, airflow, auxiliary
functions such as fan operation and electric reheat, and the controller’s alarming capabilities.

IN THIS SECTION
Scheduling ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Inactive Schedule State....................................................................................................................................... 4-4
All-day Override .................................................................................................................................................. 4-4
Schedule Broadcast ............................................................................................................................................ 4-5
Power-up State.................................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Host Override ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-7
Zone Scheduling ................................................................................................................................................. 4-7
Occupancy Detection .......................................................................................................................................... 4-7
User Override...................................................................................................................................................... 4-9
Setting the Temperature and Flow Setpoints ..........................................................................................................4-11
SBC-VAV Control Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 4-16
Constant Air Volume (CAV)............................................................................................................................... 4-16
Supply Dependant (VST) .................................................................................................................................. 4-16
Heating Only ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-18
Cooling Only ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-21
Cooling with Reheat .......................................................................................................................................... 4-23
Auxiliary Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 4-25
Series Fan......................................................................................................................................................... 4-25
Parallel Fan ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-25
Induction Damper.............................................................................................................................................. 4-25
Valve Control..................................................................................................................................................... 4-26
Digital Outputs........................................................................................................................................................ 4-29
Dual Duct Applications ........................................................................................................................................... 4-30
Tracking ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-31
Indoor Air Quality ................................................................................................................................................... 4-32

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-1

SCHEDULING SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

4.1 SCHEDULING
Scheduling controls the current zone temperature setpoint of the SBC-VAV. Internal schedules can be
defined by the user in the Schedules:Clock/Calendar and Summary [F900] channel attributes, and the
Schedules:(1-6) [F90(1-6)] attributes. Using these channels, the user can determine when and in which
schedule mode (or state) the SBC-VAV will operate—occupied, warm-up, unoccupied, or night setback.
See Section 3: SBC-VAV Attributes for a description of each schedule mode.

The SBC-VAV is equipped with:

. a Schedules:Clock/Calendar channel with user-definable attributes that reflect the current time, date,
and day, and whether or not the current day is a holiday
. a Schedules:Summary channel
. six internal schedule channels in which the user can define the SBC-VAV schedule modes.

The Schedules:Summary channel:

. reflects the values of and has an effect on how the six internal schedule channels operate
. allows the user to enter the dates of ten holidays
. allows the user to select the method of control employed when the SBC-VAV is in an inactive schedule
state
. indicates the zone reception of schedule information over the EIA-485 PUP network
. includes host schedule control options.

In addition, the user can enter the dates of ten (10) holidays in the Schedules:Clock/Calendar channel.

To configure the internal schedules by which you want the SBC-VAV to operate, refer to Table 4-1.

NOTE
Before configuring the internal schedules, set
the Schedules:Clock/Calendar:Date [F900;DT]
and Current Time [F900;TM]. If you manually
set the time and date, also click on the radio
button next to the current day in the Day
[F900;DA] attribute. Even if the current day is
already selected (this attribute defaults to
Monday), you must click on the radio button next
to the current day to set it.

Table 4-1 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for Internal Scheduling

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Schedules: Set F900;TM = the current

In the field provided, enter the current time or
Clock/Calendar: time or verify that the clock
verify that the clock has been synchronized.
Current Time has been synchronized.

4-2 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION SCHEDULING

Table 4-1 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for Internal Scheduling

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Schedules:
In the field provided, enter the current date. Set F900;DT to the current
Clock/Calendar:
(E.g., 9/15/01) date.
Current Date

Schedules:
Click on the radio button next to the current Set F900;DA to the current
Clock/Calendar:
day. day.
Day

Schedules: Set F90(1-6);WO = the time

In the field provided, enter the time at which
(1-6): at which you want warm-up
you want warm-up mode to begin.
Warm-up Time mode to begin.

Set F90(1-6);OC = the time

Schedules: In the field provided, enter the time at which
at which you want occupied
(1-6): you want occupied mode to begin. (Warm-up
mode to begin. (Warm-up
Occupied Time mode ends at this time.)
mode ends at this time.)

Set F90(1-6);UN = the time

Schedules: In the field provided, enter the time at which at which you want
(1-6): you want unoccupied mode to begin. unoccupied mode to begin.
Unoccupied Time (Occupied mode ends at this time.) (Occupied mode ends at
this time.)

Schedules: In the field provided, enter the time at which Set F90(1-6);NS = the time
(1-6): you want night setback mode to begin. at which you want night
Night Setback Time (Unoccupied Mode ends at this time.) setback mode to begin.

Use the F90(1-6);AD

bitmap to select the days by
Schedules: Click on (place a check in) the check boxes
which you want the
(1-6): next to the day(s) by which you want the
schedule to run. Set the
Active Days schedule to run.
days you want to be active
= 1.

In a situation in which schedules may overlap, the SBC-VAV will prioritize the schedule modes. The
controller checks Schedule 1 through Schedule 6 for the highest priority schedule mode, and operates in
that mode. Schedule modes take precedence in the following order:
1. Occupied (highest priority)
2. Warm-up
3. Unoccupied
4. Night Setback (lowest priority)

Eight factors can cause the current internal schedule to be overridden. The following list is the order of
precedence in which the overrides can occur.
1. User Override from SBC-STAT (highest priority)
2. Occupancy Detection
3. Broadcast Zone Value
4. Host Override

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-3

SCHEDULING SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

5. Power-up State
6. Schedule Broadcast
7. All-day Override
8. Inactive Schedule State (lowest priority)

The following subsections provide an explanation of the eight factors that can cause the current internal
schedule to be overridden.

4.1.1 INACTIVE SCHEDULE STATE

The current internal schedule will be overridden if the Schedules:Summary:Inactive Schedule State
[F900;IS] attribute is set to a higher priority schedule mode than the current internal schedule’s active
mode. For example, if the current internal schedule’s active mode is unoccupied, and IS is warm-up, the
current internal schedule will be overridden and the SBC-VAV will operate in warm-up mode (warm-up
mode is a higher priority schedule mode than unoccupied mode). To change IS, refer to Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 : Changing the Inactive Schedule State

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Set F900;IS = to the desired

schedule mode.
Schedules:
Select the desired schedule mode from the Unoccupied = 0
Summary:
drop-down box. Warm-up = 1
Inactive Schedule State
Occupied = 2
Night Setback = 3

The schedule mode set IS will be the active schedule mode unless:
. the active schedule mode is a higher priority mode
. all-day override occurs
. a scheduled broadcast is received
. a soft reset of the SBC-VAV occurs or power is restored after an unscheduled power loss and the cur-
rent time is not set or has not been synchronized
. the host overrides the schedule
. a zone broadcast is received
. an occupancy sensor is properly configured and occupancy is detected
. user override occurs.

4.1.2 ALL-DAY OVERRIDE

The current internal schedule can be overridden using the Schedules:(1-6):All-day Override [F90(1-
6);AO] attribute. For example, if the internal schedule in the Schedules:2 [F902] channel is the active
schedule, and unoccupied is the active schedule mode, the user can override the unoccupied mode by
setting AO to another desired schedule mode. The SBC-VAV will remain in AO mode until Schedules:2 is
no longer the active schedule. To employ all-day override, refer to Table 4-3.

The schedule mode set in AO will be the active mode until:

. the internal schedule that is being effected by the all-day override is no longer the active schedule
. the active internal schedule’s AO attribute is set to none [F90(1-6);AO = 0]
. a scheduled broadcast is received

4-4 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION SCHEDULING

. a soft reset of the SBC-VAV occurs or power is restored after an unscheduled power loss and the cur-
rent time is not set or has not been synchronized
. the host overrides the schedule
. a zone broadcast is received
. an occupancy sensor is properly configured and occupancy is detected
. user override occurs.

Table 4-3 : Overriding the Current Internal Schedule Using All-day Override

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Set F90(1-6);AO = the

desired schedule mode.
Schedules:
Select the desired schedule mode from the None = 0
(1-6) [whichever schedule
drop-down box in the active internal Unoccupied = 1
is the active schedule]:
schedule. Warm-up = 2
All-day Override
Occupied = 3
Night setback = 4

4.1.3 SCHEDULE BROADCAST

Broadcast Schedules are schedules sent out by networked controllers. The active internal schedule will be
overridden if the SBC-VAV is configured to receive network broadcast schedules. If the Network:Schedule
Broadcast:Receive Broadcast? [F005;RB] attribute is enabled, the current schedule will reflect the
Network:Schedule Broadcast:Current Value [F005;CV] attribute. To configure the SBC-VAV to receive
network broadcast schedules, refer to Table 4-4.

The schedule mode set by the schedule broadcast is the active mode until:
. a soft reset of the SBC-VAV occurs or power is restored after an unscheduled power loss and the cur-
rent time is not set or has not been synchronized
. the host overrides the schedule
. a zone broadcast is received
. an occupancy sensor is properly configured and occupancy is detected
. user override occurs.

4.1.4 POWER-UP STATE

If an unscheduled power loss occurs and power is restored, or if a soft reset of the SBC-VAV occurs
(System:Power-up:Reset the SBC-VAV? enabled [FF00;RS = 1]), the SBC-VAV will operate in the
schedule mode defined by the user in the Power-up State [FF00;PS] attribute until the Schedules:Clock/
Calendar:Current Time [F900;TM] is set or synchronized by a host. To set the schedule mode in which

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-5

SCHEDULING SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

you want the SBC-VAV to operate upon power restoration or after a soft reset has occurred, refer to Table
4-5.

Table 4-4 : Configuring the SBC-VAV to Receive Broadcast Schedules

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Network:
Schedule Broadcast: Click on the radio button next to Yes. Set F005;RB = 1.
Receive Broadcast

Schedules:
Summary:
Click on the radio button next to No. Set F900;HE = 0.
Host Overrides Local
Schedules?

Schedules:
Summary: Click on the radio button next to No. Set F900;ZE = 0.
Received Schedule

Schedules: In the field provided, enter the current time of Set F900;TM = the current
Clock/Calendar: day or verify that the clock has been time, or verify that the clock
Current Time synchronized. has been synchronized.

Click on the radio button next to the current

Schedules:
day. Note that even if the correct day is Set F900;DA = the current
Clock/Calendar:
already selected, you must click on it again to day.
Day
activate the setting.

Table 4-5 : Setting the SBC-VAV’s Power-up State

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Set FF00;PS = the

schedule mode in which
you want the SBC-VAV to
Click on the radio button next to the schedule operate upon power
System: restoration or after a soft
mode in which you want the SBC-VAV to
Power-up: reset has occurred.
operate upon power restoration or after a soft
Power-up State . Unoccupied = 0
reset has occurred.
. Warm-up = 1
. Occupied = 2
. Night setback = 3

4-6 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION SCHEDULING

NOTE
The SBC-VAV will remain in the schedule
mode set in PS until TM is set or
synchronized by a host. Once the TM is set
or synchronized, the SBC-VAV will return to
its internal schedule mode. Also note that
one of the other overriding factors may be
preventing the SBC-VAV from returning to
the expected schedule mode once the TM is
set or synchronized.

4.1.5 HOST OVERRIDE

When the Schedules:Summary:Host Overrides Local Schedules? [F900;HE] attribute is enabled, the
host can set the value of the Schedule Status [F900;CV] attribute through the Host Schedule Setting
[F900;HO] attribute. To enable host override, set HE to yes [F900;HE = 1].

The schedule mode set in HO will be the active mode unless:

. a soft reset of the SBC-VAV occurs or power is restored after an unscheduled power loss and the cur-
rent time is not set or has not been synchronized
. a zone broadcast is received
. an occupancy sensor is properly configured and occupancy is detected
. user override occurs.

4.1.6 ZONE SCHEDULING

Zone scheduling allows controllers with the same zone number to be scheduled identically by a master
unit. If the Schedules:Summary:Received Schedule [F900;ZE] attribute is enabled, zone scheduling is in
effect and the SBC-VAV’s schedule follows the last value successfully written to the Current Value
[F900;CV] attribute by a PUP network 'Zone Attribute Write' command specifically for the defined zone.
The defined zone is determined by the user in the Network:Configuration:Zone Number [FF00;ZN]
attribute. All controllers on the network with the same ZN will receive the broadcast. To configure the SBC-
VAV to receive zone scheduling broadcasts, refer to Table 4-6.

The broadcast Zone Schedule will be the active schedule mode unless:
. an occupancy sensor is properly configured and occupancy is detected
. user override occurs.

4.1.7 OCCUPANCY DETECTION

The occupancy detection feature enables the SBC-VAV to automatically go to occupied mode, (also called
extended occupancy,) provided that an occupancy sensor is properly installed and the SBC-VAV is
properly configured. The length of time that the SBC-VAV will operate in extended occupancy is defined by

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-7

SCHEDULING SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

the user in the Aux:Occupancy Detector:Extended Occupancy Duration [FC01;MT] attribute. To

configure the SBC-VAV for occupancy detection capability, refer to Table 4-7.

Table 4-6 : Configuring the SBC-VAV to Receive Zone Scheduling Broadcasts

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Schedules:
Summary: Click on the radio button next to Yes. Set F900;ZE = 1.
Received Schedule

FF00;ZN must be = the

The value entered in the field next to this
master unit that broadcasts
Network: attribute must be the same as the master unit
the zone scheduling,
Configuration: that broadcasts the zone scheduling,
otherwise, the SBC-VAV will
Zone Number otherwise, the SBC-VAV will not receive the
not receive the zone
zone scheduling broadcast.
scheduling broadcast.

Table 4-7 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for Occupancy Detection Capability

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

I/O Setup:
Input (UI1): Click on the radio button next to Digital. Set FE01;ST = 0.
Sensor Type

Aux:
Click on the radio button next to Enabled
Occupancy Detector: Set FC01;IC = 1.
(UI1).
Mode

Set FC01;MD = the desired

number of seconds the
In the field provided, enter the desired
occupancy detector is to
number of seconds the occupancy detector is
Aux: detect occupancy before
to detect occupancy before overriding the
Occupancy Detector: overriding the zone. This
zone. This prevents false triggering of
Extended Occupancy prevents false triggering of
occupancy detection in the event that
Delay occupancy detection in the
someone or something quickly passes
event that someone or
through the zone.
something quickly passes
through the zone.

4-8 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION SCHEDULING

Table 4-7 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for Occupancy Detection Capability

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Set FC01;MT = the desired

number of minutes the
In the field provided, enter the desired
SBC-VAV is to remain in
Aux: number of minutes the SBC-VAV is to remain
extended occupancy once it
Occupancy Detector: in extended occupancy once it is detected
is detected that the zone is
Extended Occupancy that the zone is occupied. This value must be
occupied. This value must
Duration greater than zero, otherwise the SBC-VAV
be > 0, otherwise the SBC-
will not go into extended occupancy.
VAV will not go into
extended occupancy.

NOTE
If the Extended Occupancy Duration is
not set to a value greater than zero
[FC00;MT > 0], the SBC-VAV will not go into
extended occupancy when it is detected that
the zone is occupied.

4.1.8 USER OVERRIDE

If the active schedule by which the SBC-VAV is in unoccupied mode, user override is possible. If the user
presses the up or down arrow push-button on the SBC-Stat2 or SBC-Stat3 and the
Temperature:Override:User Override attribute is enabled [FE00;SE = 1], the SBC-VAV will go to occupied
mode. The duration of this mode, which is also called extended occupancy, can be set by using the
Temperature:Override:Extended Occupancy Duration [FE00;ED] attribute. To configure the SBC-VAV for
user override ability via an SBC-STAT, refer to Table 4-8.

Table 4-8 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for User Override Ability

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Temperature:
Override: Click on the radio button next to Enabled. Set FE00;SE = 1.
User Override

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-9

SCHEDULING SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

Table 4-8 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for User Override Ability

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Set FE00;ED = the number

of minutes you want the
In the field provided, enter the number of
SBC-VAV to remain in
minutes you want the SBC-VAV to remain in
Temperature: occupied mode (extended
occupied mode (extended occupancy) once
Override: occupancy) once the up or
the up or down arrow push-button on the
Extended Occupancy down arrow push-button on
SBC-STAT2 or STAT3 is pressed. This value
Duration the SBC-STAT2 or STAT3 is
must be greater than zero, otherwise, user
pressed. This value must be
override will not take effect.
> 0, otherwise, user
override will not take effect.

4-10 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION SETTING THE TEMPERATURE AND FLOW SETPOINTS

4.2 SETTING THE TEMPERATURE AND FLOW SETPOINTS

This section provides guidelines for configuring the temperature and flow setpoints of the SBC-VAV. The
SBC-VAV maintains the zone according to the Temperature:Heating/Cooling Setpoints:Current Setpoints
[FE00;CH and FE00;CC].

NOTE
Before setting the temperature setpoints, set
the System:About:Engineering Units to the
desired unit of measurement—English or
Metric. Set FF00;EM = the desired
engineering units.
. English = 0
. Metric = 1

Changing EM will automatically convert all

setpoint and offset attributes to the same
units.

Flow settings and readings are always in

CFM.

Table 4-9 : Setting the Heating Control Temperature Setpoints

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

In the field provided, enter the temperature Set FE00;SH = the

that you want the zone to maintain when the temperature that you want
Temperature:
active schedule mode is occupied. During the zone to maintain when
Heating Setpoints:
occupied mode, the Temperature:Heating the active schedule mode is
Occupied Setpoint
Setpoints:Current Setpoint is equal to the occupied. During occupied
Occupied Setpoint. mode: FE00;CH = FE00;SH

In the field provided, enter the value you

want subtracted from the Occupied Set FE00;UH = the value to
Setpoint when the active schedule mode is be subtracted from
Temperature: unoccupied. For example, if the Occupied FE00;SH when the active
Heating Setpoints: Setpoint is 70° and the Unoccupied schedule mode is
Unoccupied Setback Setback is 4°, the value in the unoccupied. During
Temperature:Heating Setpoints:Current unoccupied mode:
Setpoint attribute will be 66° when the active FE00;CH = SH - UH
schedule mode is unoccupied.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-11

SETTING THE TEMPERATURE AND FLOW SETPOINTS SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

Table 4-9 : Setting the Heating Control Temperature Setpoints

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

In the field provided, enter the value you

want subtracted from the Occupied Set FE00;NH = the value to
Setpoint when the active schedule mode is be subtracted from
Temperature: night setback. For example, if the Occupied FE00;SH when the active
Heating Setpoints: Setpoint is 70° and the Night Setback is 8°, schedule mode is night
Night Setback the value in the Temperature:Heating setback. During night
Setpoints:Current Setpoint attribute will be setback mode: FE00;CH =
62° when the active schedule mode is night SH - NH
setback.

Set FE00;SW = the

In the field provided, enter the temperature
temperature that you want
that you want the zone to maintain when
Temperature: the zone to maintain when
warm-up is the active schedule mode. During
Heating Setpoints: Warm-up is the active
warm-up mode, the Temperature:Heating
Warm-up Setpoint schedule mode. During
Setpoints:Current Setpoint is equal to the
warm-up mode: FE00;CH =
Warm-up Setpoint.
SW

Table 4-10 : Setting the Cooling Control Temperature Setpoints

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

In the field provided, enter the temperature Set FE00;SC = the

that you want the zone to maintain when the temperature that you want
Temperature:
active schedule mode is occupied. During the zone to maintain when
Cooling Setpoints:
occupied mode, the Temperature:Cooling the active schedule mode is
Occupied Setpoint
Setpoints:Current Setpoint is equal to the occupied. During occupied
Occupied Setpoint. mode: FE00;CC = FE00;SC

In the field provided, enter the value you

want added to the Occupied Setpoint when
Set FE00;UC = the value to
the active schedule mode is unoccupied. For
be added to FE00;SC when
Temperature: example, if the Occupied Setpoint is 70°
the active schedule mode is
Cooling Setpoints: and the Unoccupied Setback is 4°, the
unoccupied. During
Unoccupied Setback value in the Temperature:Cooling
unoccupied mode:
Setpoints:Current Setpoint attribute will be
FE00;CC = SC + UC
74° when the active schedule mode is
unoccupied.

4-12 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION SETTING THE TEMPERATURE AND FLOW SETPOINTS

Table 4-10 : Setting the Cooling Control Temperature Setpoints

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

In the field provided, enter the value you

want added to the Occupied Setpoint when Set FE00;NC = the value to
the active schedule mode is night setback. be added to FE00;SC when
Temperature:
For example, if the Occupied Setpoint is the active schedule mode is
Cooling Setpoints:
70° and the Night Setback is 8°, the value in night setback. During night
Night Setback
the Temperature:Cooling Setpoints:Current setback mode: FE00;CC =
Setpoint attribute will be 78° when the active SC + NC
schedule mode is night setback.

Table 4-11 : Setting the Heating Control Flow Attributes

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Set FA01;HM = the value of

In the field provided, enter the value of the
Flow: the minimum rate at which
minimum rate at which you want air to flow
Heating: you want air to flow through
through the duct. This value is measured in
Heating Minimum Flow the duct. This value is
CFM.
measured in CFM.

Set FA01;HX = the value of

In the field provided, enter the value of the
Flow: the maximum rate at which
maximum rate at which you want air to flow
Heating: you want air to flow through
through the duct. This value is measured in
Heating Maximum Flow the duct. This value is
CFM.
measured in CFM.

Set FA01;HP = the number

Flow: In the field provided, enter the number of
of degrees from FE00;HS
Heating: degrees from the Occupied Setpoint over
over which proportional
Heating Proportional Band which proportional heating will take place.
heating will take place.

Set FA01;HI = the

In the field provided, enter the percentage of
Flow: percentage of accumulated
accumulated error used to calculate the
Heating: error used to calculate the
required supply airflow. American Auto-
Heating Integration required supply airflow.
Matrix (AAM) recommends setting this
Constant AAM recommends setting
attribute to 5%.
this attribute to 5%.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-13

SETTING THE TEMPERATURE AND FLOW SETPOINTS SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

Table 4-12 : Setting the Cooling Control Flow Attributes

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Set FA01;CM = the value of

In the field provided, enter the value of the
Flow: the minimum rate at which
minimum rate at which you want air to flow
Cooling: you want air to flow through
through the duct. This value is measured in
Cooling Minimum Flow the duct. This value is
CFM.
measured in CFM.

Set FA01;CX = the value of

In the field provided, enter the value of the
Flow: the maximum rate at which
maximum rate at which you want air to flow
Cooling: you want air to flow through
through the duct. This value is measured in
Cooling Maximum Flow the duct. This value is
CFM.
measured in CFM.

Set FA01;CP = the number

Flow: In the field provided, enter the number of
of degrees from FE00;CS
Cooling: degrees from the Occupied Setpoint over
over which proportional
Cooling Proportional Band which proportional cooling will take place.
heating will take place.

Set FA01;CI = the

Flow: In the field provided, enter the percentage of percentage of accumulated
Cooling: accumulated error used to calculate the error used to calculate the
Cooling Integration required supply airflow. AAM recommends required supply airflow.
Constant setting this attribute to 5%. AAM recommends setting
this attribute equal to 5%.

Table 4-13 : Setting the Warm-up Flow Attributes

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Set FA01;WM = the value of

In the field provided, enter the value of the
Flow: the minimum rate at which
minimum rate at which you want air to flow
Warm-up: you want air to flow through
through the duct when the active schedule
Warm-up Minimum Flow the duct when the active
mode is warm-up.
schedule mode is warm-up.

Set FA01;WX = the value of

In the field provided, enter the value of the
Flow: the maximum rate at which
maximum rate at which you want air to flow
Warm-up: you want air to flow through
through the duct when the active schedule
Warm-up Maximum Flow the duct when the active
mode is warm-up.
schedule mode is warm-up.

4-14 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION SETTING THE TEMPERATURE AND FLOW SETPOINTS

Table 4-13 : Setting the Warm-up Flow Attributes

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Flow: Set FA01;WP = the number

In the field provided, enter the number of
Warm-up: of degrees from FE00;WS
degrees from the Warm-up Setpoint over
Warm-up Proportional over which proportional
which proportional heating will take place.
Band heating will take place.

Set FA01;WI = the

Flow: In the field provided, enter the percentage of percentage of accumulated
Warm-up: accumulated error used to calculate the error used to calculate the
Warm-up Integration required supply airflow. AAM recommends required supply airflow.
Constant setting this attribute to 10%. AAM recommends setting
this attribute equal to 10%.

NOTE
The Minimum and Maximum Flow
attributes should not exceed the minimum
and maximum allowable rates of flow
specified by the manufacturer of the VAV
terminal box.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-15

SBC-VAV CONTROL MODES SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

4.3 SBC-VAV CONTROL MODES

The SBC-VAV can operate in one of five control modes:
. Constant Air Volume (CAV)
. Cooling Only
. Heating Only
. Supply Dependant [Variable Supply Temperature (VST)]
. Cooling with Reheat

The following subsections provide explanations of and configuration instructions for the different control
modes of the SBC-VAV.

4.3.1 CONSTANT AIR VOLUME (CAV)

The SBC-VAV is capable of controlling (CAV) terminal boxes. With a CAV unit, zone temperature is not a
control factor. Instead, the value defined by the user in the Flow:Control:Target Flow [FA00;CD] attribute
becomes the constant volume setpoint. The SBC-VAV will modulate the damper appropriately to maintain
the CD while airflow is present. Reheat capabilities are identical to VAV operation. The reheat measured
variable is the zone temperature. To configure the SBC-VAV for CAV control, refer to Table 4-14.

4.3.2 SUPPLY DEPENDANT (VST)

When operating in supply dependant mode, the SBC-VAV monitors the temperature of the source/duct air,
determines whether or not the air is hot or cold enough to heat or cool the zone, then automatically
functions in heating or cooling mode accordingly. This requires that the box has a supply temperature
sensor. For example, if the Temperature:Supply:Supply Temperature [FE08;CV] is greater than both the
Temperature:Thermostat:Zone Temperature [FE00;ZT] and the Temperature:Heating Setpoints:Current
Setpoint [FE00;CH], the SBC-VAV will operate in heating mode and open the damper to provide the warm
supply air to the zone (the source, or supply air is warm enough to heat the space). Conversely, if
FE08;CV is less than both ZT and the Temperature:Cooling Setpoints:Current Setpoint [FE00;CC], the
SBC-VAV will operate in cooling mode and open the damper to provide the cool supply air to the zone (the
source, or supply air is cold enough to cool the space).

Using the Auto Mode Deadband [FE00;DD] attribute, the user can define the point at which the terminal
box will go into cooling or heating mode. For example, if DD is set to 3and the Current (temperature)
Setpoint is 70

. the SBC-VAV will switch to heating only mode and supply the warm source air to the zone when the
Supply Temperature exceeds 73
. the SBC-VAV will switch to cooling only mode and supply the cool source air to the zone when the
Supply Temperature drops below 67
. the SBC-VAV will remain in the last active mode when the temperature is in the deadband (67 to 73).

Table 4-14 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for CAV Control

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Temperature:
Thermostat: Click on the radio button next to None (CAV). Set FE00;BT = 0
VAV Control Mode

4-16 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION SBC-VAV CONTROL MODES

Table 4-14 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for CAV Control

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Flow:
In the field provided, enter the desired Set FA00;CD = desired
Control:
constant volume setpoint (in cfm). constant volume setpoint
Target Flow

Set the temperature and flow setpoints as desired. Refer to Table 4-9 and Table 4-11 for instructions on
configuring these setpoints.

Deadband

Cooling Heating
Mode Mode

ZT ST
(zone (supply
temp.) temperature)

CC CH
(current cooling (current heating
setpoint) setpoint)

Figure 4-1: Supply Dependant (VST) Control

Table 4-15 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for Supply Dependant Control

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Temperature:
Click on the radio button next to Supply
Thermostat: Set FE00;BT = 3.
Dependant (VST).
VAV Control Mode

Enter the desired value in the field provided.

Temperature: Set FE00;DD = the value
This value will be subtracted from the heating
Supply: you want subtracted from
Current Setpoint and added to the cooling
Auto Mode Deadband CH and added to CC.
Current Setpoint.

Set the temperature and flow setpoints as desired. Refer to Table 4-9 and Table 4-11 for instructions on
configuring these setpoints.

The mode in which the SBC-VAV is operating will be indicated in the Temperature:Supply:Supply Mode
attribute (FE00;SM will = 0 if in cooling mode and 1 if in heating mode).

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-17

SBC-VAV CONTROL MODES SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

When in VST mode, the SBC-VAV will override the minimum airflow settings to prevent undesired cooling
and heating. Dampers will fully close when the supply air is not suitable for what the zone is calling.

In the event that the CC is greater than the CH [FE00;CC > FE00;CH], the DD attribute must be set to half
the difference between the setpoints to create a deadband with a wide enough range to provide sufficient
heating/cooling. For example, if you set CC to 74 and CH is 70, set DD to 2 to create a sufficient
deadband.

4.3.3 HEATING ONLY

When configured for heating only control, the SBC-VAV uses Proportional+Integral (PI) control to
modulate the damper and control airflow to the zone based on two factors; the
Temperature:Thermostat:Zone Temperature [FE00;ZT] and the Current (heating) Setpoint [FE00;CH]. If
the ZT is less than the Current Setpoint, the SBC-VAV will open the damper and provide warm air to the
zone to maintain a ZT as close as possible to the Current Setpoint.

NOTE
Scheduling controls the Current
(temperature) Setpoint.

Heating only VAV works on a reverse acting ramp that slopes from the values defined by the user in the
Flow:Heating:Heating Minimum Flow [FA01;HM] to the Heating Maximum Flow [FA01;HX] attributes.
When ZT strays from CH, the SBC-VAV opens the damper—increasing the supply airflow to the zone. As
ZT reaches the CH, the SBC-VAV closes the damper to minimize airflow. No fan or reheat stage control
exists when the SBC-VAV is configured for heating only control. See Figure 4-2.

To configure the SBC-VAV for heating only control, refer to Table 4-16.

4-18 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION SBC-VAV CONTROL MODES

Damper Position
HP
Heating
HX Proportional
Heating Band
Max. Flow

HM
Heating
Min. Flow

cooler warmer
Heating
Setpoint
HC

Figure 4-2: Heating Only

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-19

SBC-VAV CONTROL MODES SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

Hot
Air from Main
Air Handler Unit
To Other
Zones

Terminal Box

Airflow Sensor

High

Low

Damper
Used to Control
Flow to Zone

Discharged
to Zone

Zone
Temperature
Sensor

Figure 4-3: Example of a Heating Only Application

Table 4-16 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for Heating Only Control

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Temperature:
Click on the Radio Button next to Heating
Thermostat: Set FE00;BT = 2.
Only.
VAV Control Mode

Set FA00;CK = the scaling

Flow: In the field provided, enter the scaling factor
factor specified by the
Control: specified by the manufacturer of the VAV
manufacturer of the VAV
Duct Scaling Factor (K) box.
box.

Set the temperature and flow setpoints as desired. Refer to Table 4-9 and Table 4-11 for instructions on
configuring these setpoints.

4-20 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION SBC-VAV CONTROL MODES

4.3.4 COOLING ONLY

When configured for cooling only control, the SBC-VAV uses PI control to modulate the damper and
control airflow to the zone based on two factors; the Temperature:Thermostat:Zone Temperature
[FE00;ZT] and the Temperature:Cooling Setpoints:Current Setpoint [FE00;CC]. If ZT is greater than CC,
the SBC-VAV will open the damper and provide cool air to the zone to maintain ZT as close as possible to
the CC.

NOTE
Scheduling controls the current temperature
setpoint.

Cooling only VAV works on a forward acting ramp that slopes from the values defined by the user in the
Flow:Cooling:Cooling Minimum Flow [FA01;CM] and Cooling Maximum Flow [FA01;CX] attributes.
When the ZT strays from the CC, the SBC-VAV opens the damper—increasing the supply airflow to the
zone. As the ZT reaches the CC, the SBC-VAV closes the damper to minimize airflow (See Figure 4-4).
Refer to Table 4-17 to configure the SBC-VAV for cooling only control.

Damper
Position
CP
cooling proportional CX
band cooling
max flow

CM
cooling
min flow

temp temp
(cooler) (warmer)

CC
cooling
setpoint
Figure 4-4: Cooling Only

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-21

SBC-VAV CONTROL MODES SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

Chilled
Air from Main
Air Handler Unit
To Other
Zones

Terminal Box

Airflow Sensor

High

Low

Damper
Used to Control
Flow to Zone

Discharged
to Zone

Zone
Temperature
Sensor

Figure 4-5: Example of a Cooling Only Application

Table 4-17 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for Cooling Only Control

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Temperature:
Click on the radio button next to Cooling
Thermostat: Set FE00;BT = 1.
Only.
VAV Control Mode

Set FA00;CK = the scaling

Flow: In the field provided, enter the scaling factor
factor specified by the
Control: specified by the manufacturer of the VAV
manufacturer of the VAV
Duct Scaling Factor (K) box.
box.

Set the temperature and flow setpoints as desired. Refer to Table 4-10 and Table 4-12 for instructions on
configuring these setpoints.

4-22 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION SBC-VAV CONTROL MODES

4.3.5 COOLING WITH REHEAT

Cooling with reheat control uses the VAV box damper to let in cool supply air while providing any needed
heating through up to four stages of electric reheat.

The SBC-VAV will maintain the Temperature:Cooling Setpoints:Current Setpoint [FE00;CC] by providing
supply air through proportional damper positioning. With its PI algorithm, the SBC-VAV will modulate the
damper to maintain the Temperature:Thermostat:Zone Temperature [FE00;ZT] between CC and the
Temperature:Heating Setpoints:Current Setpoint [FE00;CH]. The reheat stages will energize at the time
interval defined by the user in the Aux:Electric Reheat:Stage Delay [FA03;ID] attribute until ZT reaches
CH. Reheat stages de-energize at thirty-second intervals.

The SBC-VAV prolongs the life of reheats through its Aux:Electric Reheat:Balance Stage Usage
[FA03;BA] attribute. With this attribute enabled, reheat stages with less run time will energize first. To
configure the SBC-VAV for cooling with reheat control, refer to Table 4-18.

Table 4-18 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for Cooling with Reheat Control

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Temperature:
Click on the radio button next to the Cooling
Thermostat: Set FE00;BT = 4
w/Reheat option.
VAV Control Mode

Set FA00;CK = the scaling

Flow: In the field provided, enter the scaling factor
factor specified by the
Control: specified by the manufacturer of the VAV
manufacturer of the VAV
Duct Scaling Factor (K) box.
box.

Select the desired mode from the drop-down Set FA03;RO = the desired
box: mode:
Aux: . Disabled . Disabled = 0
Electric Reheat:
. 2-Stage (K2-K3) . 2-Stage (K2-K3) = 1
Reheat Mode
. 2-Stage (K4-K5) . 2-Stage (K4-K5) = 2
. 4-Stage (K2-K5) . 4-Stage (K2-K5) = 3

Set FA03;OF = the number

Aux: In the field provided, enter the number of of minutes you want to
Electric Reheat: minutes you want to expire before the expire before the second
Stage Delay second and each additional stage energizes. and each additional stage
energizes.

Set the temperature and flow setpoints as desired. Refer to Table 4-10 and Table 4-12 for instructions on
configuring these setpoints.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-23

SBC-VAV CONTROL MODES SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

100% Heating Cooling Max.

Open Proportional Proportional Flow
Band Band
Deadband

Airflow

Heating
Flow

Min.
Flow
0%
Open

Heating Cooling
Setpoint Setpoint

cooler ZONE TEMPERATURE warmer

Figure 4-6: Cooling with Reheat

4-24 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

4.4 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

4.4.1 SERIES FAN
In series fan applications, the fan output is energized when the active schedule mode is either occupied or
warm-up. When the active schedule mode is unoccupied, the fan is temperature-controlled, unless the
Aux:Fan:Series Fan Unoccupied Mode attribute is set to Always On [FB01;SF = 0]. When night setback
is the active mode, the series fan remains off unless the Temperature:Thermostat:Zone Temperature
[FE00;ZT] varies beyond the limits of the control deadband.

Table 4-19 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for Series Fan Operation

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Aux:
Fan: Select Series Fan from the drop-down box. Set FB01;FO = 1.
Fan/Damper Mode

Aux: Click on the radio button next to the desired

Set FB01;SF as desired.
Fan: operation mode when the active schedule
0 = Always on
Series Fan Unoccupied mode is unoccupied: Always on, or Off in
1 = Off in deadband
Mode Deadband

Set FB01;FC = the number

In the field provided, enter the number of of minutes you want the fan
Aux:
minutes you want the fan output to stay output to stay energized/de-
Fan:
energized/de-energized. This prevents short energized. This prevents
Minimum Cycle Time
cycling of the fan output. short cycling of the fan
output.

4.4.2 PARALLEL FAN

When Aux:Fan:Fan Damper Mode is set to Parallel Fan [FB01;FO = 2], the parallel fan is energized when
the active schedule mode is occupied and Flow:Control:Current Value [FA00;CV] is less than
Aux:Fan:Fan Setpoint [FB01;FS]. If FS is equal to zero, the fan is energized when
Temperature:Thermostat:Zone Temperature [FE00;ZT] is less than Current (heating) Setpoint
[FE00;CH].

4.4.3 INDUCTION DAMPER

The SBC-VAV can control an induction damper. The induction damper opens when the current airflow falls
below the values set in the Flow:Cooling/Heating/Warm-up:Minimum Flow [FA01;CM, HM, and WM]
attributes. The induction damper closes when the current airflow rises above the values set in the
Flow:Cooling/Heating/Warm-up:Maximum Flow [FA01;CX, HX, and WX] attributes. To configure the SBC-
VAV for operation of an induction damper, select Induction Damper from the drop-down box next to the
Aux:Fan:Fan/Damper Mode attribute [set FB01;FO = 3].

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-25

AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

4.4.4 VALVE CONTROL

NOTE
Using FA08 and FA09 for Valve control
prohibits the use of reheats. FA08 uses
triacs 2 and 3, and FA09 uses triacs 4 and 5.

There are two types of valve control provided by the SBC-VAV: pulse width modulated control and floating
setpoint control. The SBC-VAV uses its PI algorithm to calculate the percent of control needed for pulse
width driven motor valves. There are two (2) valve control channels, FA08 and FA09.

The user-defined value in the Aux:Valve Control:Valve Offset [FA08/FA09;VO] attribute is added to the
Temperature:Cooling Setpoints:Current Setpoint [FE00;CC] or subtracted from Temperature:Heating
Setpoints:Current Setpoint [FE00;CH] for calculation of the loop setpoint.

For hot water reheat operations, the valve operates in a reverse acting ramp. As the
Temperature:Thermostat:Zone Temperature [FE00;ZT] falls below the CH, the valve begins to open. As
the ZT rises, the valve will begin to close.

In chilled water applications, the valve operates in a normal acting ramp. As the ZT rises above CC, the
valve begins to open. As the temperature falls below CC, the valve begins to close.

The user-defined value in the Aux:Valve Control:Valve Proportional Band [FA08/FA09;VP] attribute
specifies the input variable range, in degrees (0.0 to 25.5), over which the output value is proportional to
the error value. The proportional band is offset from the setpoint for the loop. This point defaults to 5.0.

Valve Valve
Position Position

VP VP
hot water valve chill water valve
proportional band proportional band
maximum maximum
valve valve
position position
p
re

m
ve

ra
rs

g
e

tin
ac

ac
tin

al
g

m
ra

r
no
m
p

lower higher
temp temp

damper control CH minus damper control CC plus

valve control VO valve control VO

Figure 4-7 Valve Ramps

The Aux:Valve Control:Valve Integration Constant [FA08/FA09;VI] attribute shows the amount of
proportional error history (0 to 25.5%) used to calculate the desired position for the valve and to create an

4-26 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

accumulated integral sum. This integral sum, applied once per minute, is used to control overshoot while
the loop is operating within the confines of the proportional band.

4.4.4.1 BASIC CONFIGURATION FOR PWM VALVE CONTROL

Refer to Table 4-20 to configure the SBC-VAV for pulse width modulated valve control.

NOTE
The SBC-VAVra, and SBC-VAVrf should not
be used for PWM control. AAM recommend
only the SBC-VAVta and -VAVtf be used for
PWM control.

Table 4-20 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for Pulse Width Modulated Valve Control

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Aux:
Click on the radio button next to Pulse Width
Valve Control:1,2 Set FA08/FA09;VM = 0.
Modulation.
Valve Mode

Flow:
Proof of Flow: Select None from the drop-down box. Set FC02;DR = 0.
Proof of Flow Method

Set FA08/FA09;VU to the

Aux: desired control mode
Click on the radio button next to the desired
Valve Control:1, 2 . 0 = Disabled
control mode: Disabled, Cooling, or Heating.
Valve Use . 1 = Cooling
. 2 = Heating

Aux: In the field provided, enter the number of Set FA08/FA09;VT = the
Valve Control:1, 2 seconds the valve is to be pulsed on. Refer number of seconds the
Pulse Duration Period to the valve manufacturer’s specifications. valve is to be pulsed on.

4.4.4.2 BASIC CONFIGURATION FOR FLOATING SETPOINT VALVE CONTROL

Refer to Table 4-21 to configure the SBC-VAV for floating setpoint valve control.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-27

AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

Table 4-21 : Configuring the SBC-VAV for Floating Setpoint Valve Control

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Aux:
Click on the radio button next to Floating
Valve Control:1, 2 Set FA08/FA09;VM = 1.
Point Motor Control.
Valve Mode

Flow:
Proof of Flow: Select None from the drop-down box Set FC02;DR = 0.
Proof of Flow

Set FA08/FA09;VU to the

Aux: desired control mode:
Click on the radio button next to the desired
Valve Control:1, 2 . 0 = Disabled
control mode: Disabled, Cooling, or Heating.
Valve Use . 1 = Cooling
. 2 = Heating

Set FA08/FA09;VT = the

In the field provided, enter the number of number of seconds it takes
Aux:
seconds it takes the valve to go from fully the valve to go from fully
Valve Control:1, 2
closed to fully open. Refer to the valve closed to fully open. Refer
Valve Travel Time
manufacturer’s specifications. to the valve manufacturer’s
specifications.

4-28 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION DIGITAL OUTPUTS

4.5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

The digital (relay) outputs are used to determine the state of the SBC-VAV outputs. The configuration of
the digital outputs includes the Current Value, Output Polarity, Runtime Hours, Runtime Limit, and
Override.

Refer to Table 4-22 to configure the digital outputs.

Table 4-22 : Configuring the Digital Outputs

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Click the radio button next to the desired

output polarity: Normal or Reverse. Set FB0x;OP to the desired
Input/Output Setup:
Output Polarity:
Relay Outputs:
When CV=1, setting OP to normal (0) . 0 = Normal
Output Polarity
energizes the output. When CV=0, setting . 1 = Reverse
OP to reverse (1) energizes the output.

Set FB0x;RL = a run time

In the field provided, enter a run time limit in limit in hours. When the run
Input/Output Setup: hours for the output. When the run hours for hours for the output exceed
Relay Outputs: the output exceed the runtime limit (RH>RL), the runtime limit
Runtime Limit the SBC-VAV will generate a runtime limit (FB0x;RH>FB0x;RL), the
alarm SBC-VAV will generate a
runtime limit alarm.

Set FB0x;OI = appropriate

After setting up and verifying all other option:
Input/Output Setup: . 0 = Off (default)
configuration options, click the radio button
Relay Outputs:
next to the appropriate Override option: Off, . 1 = On
Override
On, Auto, Manual. . 2 = Auto
. 3 = Manual

NOTE
To allow full configuration before controller
operation, Input/Output Setup:Relay
Outputs:Override is factory set to Off (OI =
0). After all other configurations are
complete, each digital output must be
manually enabled as appropriate to the
installation.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-29

DUAL DUCT APPLICATIONS SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

4.6 DUAL DUCT APPLICATIONS

NOTE
Only the SBC-VAVrf can be used in dual
duct applications.

Only the SBC-VAVrf can be used in dual duct applications. Connect the internal feedback actuator to the
hot duct, and the external actuator to the cold duct. The external actuator must be connected to an
external power supply and Relays 4 and 5 (K4 and K5) on the controller. Refer to Section 2, Wiring and
Installation for additional information on wiring an external actuator.

The flow sensor must be connected to pitot tubes located after the hot and cold duct junction.

To configure the SBC-VAVrf for dual duct applications, refer to Table 4-23.

Table 4-23 : Configuring the SBC-VAVrf for Dual Duct Application

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Temperature:
Click on the radio button next to Supply
Thermostat: Set FE00;BT = 3
Dependant (VST).
VAV Control Mode

Flow:
Click the radio button next to Dual Mixed
Damper Set FA00;DC = 2
(CAV)
Damper Control

Flow:
Set FA00;EF=the maximum
Damper In the field provided, enter the maximum hot
hot duct airflow value (in
Estimated Flow at Full duct airflow value (in CFM).
CFM).
Open

Flow:
In the field provided, enter the desired CAV Set FA00;CD=the desired
Control:
airflow value (in CFM). CAV airflow value (in CFM).
Target Flow

Flow:
Click on the radio button next to LM-24M
Damper: Set FA00;AT=0
(MMT).
Actuator Type

4-30 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION TRACKING

4.7 TRACKING
An SBC-VAV configured as a slave can “track” the Average Flow of an SBC-VAV configured as a master.
The Target Flow of the slave SBC-VAV will then be derived from the Average Flow (FA00;CA) of the
master and the user-defined Flow Offset (FA00;OF) of the slave. Refer to Table 4-24 to configure the slave
controller for tracking.

Table 4-24 : Configuring a Slave SBC-VAV for Tracking

Attribute Path for

Graphical User Interface
GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
(GUI) Utility:Attribute
Name

Temperature:
Sensor Bus: Click on the radio button next to Slave. Set FE00;BM=1
Bus Mode

In the field provided, enter the value (in CFM) Set FA00;OF = the value (in
Flow:
you want added to/subtracted from the CFM) you want the slave
Control:
master controller’s Average Flow (FA00;CA) SBC-VAV to consider when
Offset
when determining its Target Flow. determining its Target Flow.

Flow:
Control: Click on the radio button next to Tracking. Set FA00;AC=2
Control Mode

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-31

INDOOR AIR QUALITY SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

4.8 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

The SBC-VAVta-IAQ and SBC-VAVtf-IAQ are capable of providing Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) control based
upon space Carbon Dioxide (CO2) levels. The IAQ VAV monitors space CO2 levels and upon the
detection of high CO2 levels, initiates the IAQ control and overrides the normal temperature control
sequence. The IAQ control gradually opens the damper to a predefined airflow setpoint in order to dilute
the high space CO2 levels. In this application, it is assumed that the Air Handling Unit providing supply air
to the VAV unit monitors CO2 levels in the building and adjust its air mixture accordingly.

On the controller, the CO2 sensor must be connected to the dedicated input, Universal Input 3 (UI3). UI3
is only intended for a CO2 sensor and is capable of accepting sensor types: current (0-20 mA), resistance
(0-1MW), or voltage (0-10VDC). For help in configuring Universal Input 3 for the correct sensor type, refer
to Section 3.7.1.

NOTE
Indoor Air Quality control will not operate in Dual Duct applications.

Table 4-25: Configuring Indoor Air Quality

Attribute Path for Graphical User

Interface (GUI) Utility:Attribute GUI Configuration Utility Setting Channel Setting
Name

Flow:
Select Automatic from the drop
Damper: Set FA00;DM = 0
window
Damper Mode

Flow: In the field provided, enter the

Set FA01;AS to desired CO2 level
Indoor Air Quality: desired CO2 level for the zone (in
Air Quality Setpoint (in PPM)
PPM)

Flow: In the field provided, enter the

Set FA01;DB to desired control
Indoor Air Quality: deadband of CO 2reading allowed
deadband
Air Quality Deadband before the damper control occurs

In the field provided, enter the

Flow: ramp rate (in percent-per-minute) Set FA01;RP to desired ramp rate
Indoor Air Quality: at which the damper will move to for damper control (in percent-per-
Air Quality Damper Ramp Rate compensate for changes in CO2 minute)
levels in the zone

Flow: In the field provided, enter the Set FA01;AM to desired maximum
Indoor Air Quality: maximum air flow (in CFM) air flow (In CFM) allowed during
Air Quality Control Max Air Flow allowed during CO2control CO2 control.

4-32 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION INDOOR AIR QUALITY

Using the Air Quality (IAQ) Setpoint [FA01;AS] and the Air Quality (IAQ) Deadband [FA01;DB] attributes,
the user defines when IAQ control overrides the normal temperature control. This occurs when the CO2
level, as sensed by Universal Input 3 [FE03;CV], rises above the combined level of AS and DB. While in
IAQ control, the damper continues to open at a rate as determined by the Air Quality Damper Ramp Rate
[FA01;RP] until the airflow reaches the maximum setpoint. The normal temperature control resumes when
the CO2 level again equals AS minus DB.

Figure 4-8 Indoor Air Quality Diagram

The Maximum Airflow allowed when in IAQ control is dependant upon the current mode of the VAV
controller. The following table indicates what the maximum airflow setpoint is if IAQ override occurs in
each mode:

Table 4-26: Air Flow Control with IAQ Control Enabled

Current Mode Maximum Air Flow Setpoitn

Venting IAQ Max Air Flow [FA01;AM]

Heating IAQ Max Air Flow [FA01;AM] or Heating Max Flow [FA01;HX]*

Cooling IAQ Max Air Flow [FA01;AM] or Cooling Max Flow [FA01;CX]*

Warmup IAQ Max Air Flow [FA01;AM] or Warmup Max Flow [FA01;WX]*

* Maximum Air Flow Setpoint is determined by the lower setpoint.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) 4-33

INDOOR AIR QUALITY SECTION 4: CONFIGURATION

4-34 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

 SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES
SBC-STATs use information from a connected SBC controller. The SBC-STAT3 displays this
information on its graphical display and gives the user the ability to navigate through the menus
using its four buttons. The following section describes the SBC-STAT setpoint adjustment and
LED, and the SBC-STAT3 menus when connected to an SBC-VAV.

IN THIS SECTION
Temperature Display ................................................................................................................................................ 5-3
Setpoint Adjustment Display .................................................................................................................................... 5-4
SBC-STAT2......................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
SBC-STAT2-D ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
SBC-STAT3......................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
Calculated Setpoint Display ..................................................................................................................................... 5-5
LED .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
Override Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Menu Actions ........................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
Enable/Disable Values ........................................................................................................................................ 5-8
Setting Values ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
SBC-STAT3 Menus .................................................................................................................................................. 5-9
User Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
Install Menu....................................................................................................................................................... 5-10
Balance Menu ................................................................................................................................................... 5-13
Service Menu .................................................................................................................................................... 5-17

SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012) 5-1

 SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES

5-2 SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

5.1 TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

When connected to an SBC-VAV, an SBC-STAT3 displays the room temperature (in degrees Celsius or
Fahrenheit) with Warm-up, Setback, Occupied, or Unoccupied on the bottom left of the display. Also
Heat, Cool, or Vent is displayed on the bottom right of the display.

71.5˚F
OCCUPIED COOL

   

Figure 5-1: Room Temperature Display

SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012) 5-3

SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES

5.2 SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY

When you press the up or down arrow button on the SBC-STAT3, a setpoint adjustment display appears
and the LED blinks.

+ 0.5˚F
Cool         Warm

   

Figure 5-2: Setpoint Adjustment Display

5.2.1 SBC-STAT2
When the up or down arrow button is first pressed, the LED will flash to indicate the current setpoint. If the
up or down arrow is pressed again within 15 seconds the setpoint will change one position and the red
LED will flash for that setpoint. The setpoint range is one (1) through five (5) flashes. Each additional flash
indicates a warmer setting. See Table 5-2 LED for more information on the blinking pattern for setpoint
adjustment.

5.2.2 SBC-STAT2-D
When the up or down arrow button is first pressed, the LED will flash to indicate the current setpoint. If the
up or down arrow is pressed again within 15 seconds the setpoint will change one position and the red
LED will flash for that setpoint. The setpoint can be adjusted five increments on either side of zero with
zero being six (6) red flashes. See Table 5-2 LED for more information on the blinking pattern for setpoint
adjustment.

5.2.3 SBC-STAT3
When the up or down arrow button is first pressed, the current setpoint offset will be displayed on the
graphical display. If the button is pressed again within 15 seconds, the setpoint will move one increment in
the direction of the button pressed. The setpoint can be adjusted five increments on either side of zero with
zero being six (6) red flashes. The magnitude of the increment is programmed at installation.

5-4 SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES CALCULATED SETPOINT DISPLAY

5.3 CALCULATED SETPOINT DISPLAY

In version 4.00 firmware or greater, the SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) allows users to choose a method of setpoint
display on an SBC-STAT3 when a user adjusts the zone setpoint. Four options are availble for setpoint
displayed and are outlined in Table 5-1

Table 5-1: Calculated Setpoint Display Options

Channel and Attribute Value Setpoint Display

FE00;SD 0 Standard Offset (+/-2.5)

1 Zone Midpoint (FE00;ZS)

2 Heating Setpoint (FE00;CH)

3 Cooling Setpoint (FE00;CC)

SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012) 5-5

LED SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES

5.4 LED
The following table lists the blinking patterns that occur during specific events in the SBC-STAT.

Table 5-2 LED

Event SBC-STAT2 flash SBC-STAT2-D flash SBC-STAT3 flash

coldest = 1 red flash coldest = 1 red flash

= 2 red flashes = 2 red flashes
= 3 red flashes = 3 red flashes
coldest = 1 red flash = 4 red flashes = 4 red flashes
colder = 2 red flashes = 5 red flashes = 5 red flashes
Setpoint
normal = 3 red flashes normal = 6 red flashes normal = 6 red flashes
adjustment
warmer = 4 red flashes = 7 red flashes = 7 red flashes
warmest = 5 red flashes = 8 red flashes = 8 red flashes
= 9 red flashes = 9 red flashes
= 10 red flashes = 10 red flashes
warmest = 11 red flashes warmest = 11 red flashes

red flash every 6

Override mode red flash every 6 seconds no flash
seconds

Occupied mode no flash solid green solid green

Warm-up no flash flashing green flashing green

Night Setback no flash periodic yellow flash periodic yellow flash

Unoccupied mode no flash periodic yellow flash periodic yellow flash

Menus no flash no flash solid yellow

5-6 SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES OVERRIDE MODE

5.5 OVERRIDE MODE

NOTE
Users can not enter override mode through
an SBC-STAT unless the following criteria
are met:

. The SBC-VAV’s Temperature:Override:

User Override attribute is enabled
[FE00;SE = 1];
. The Extended Occupancy Duration
attribute is greater than or equal to 1
[FE00;ED  1]; and
. The active schedule mode is warm-up,
unoccupied, or night setback.

The SBC-STAT2 and SBC-STAT2-D can enter override mode through any keypress. Once in override
mode, the LED will flash red every six seconds. To cancel override mode hold down the up or down arrow
button for five seconds or until the LED starts flashing. The LED will flash a minimum of ten times to
confirm the cancellation.

Through the SBC-STAT3, override mode will begin when:

. the up or down arrow button on the SBC-STAT3 is pressed; or

. the user enters override mode through the User Menu. Refer to Section 5.7.1.

SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012) 5-7

MENU ACTIONS SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES

5.6 MENU ACTIONS

When you enter a menu you can enable/disable or set/edit a value. Sections 5.6.1 and 5.6.2 describe how
to perform these actions.

5.6.1 ENABLE/DISABLE VALUES

After entering a menu, use the up and down arrows to highlight a selection, then press the 4 button to
initiate an action or enable/disable a function. Press the 6 button to exit and return to the previous menu.
Refer to Section 5.7 for more information about the SBC-STAT3 menus.

NOTE
Only one action per menu can be enabled at
any time. To disable an action highlight the
action and press 4.

5.6.2 SETTING VALUES

Options in the Install, Balance, and Service menus allow values to be set. Selecting one of these options
opens an Edit screen allowing you to use the 4 button to move places to the right and the s and t buttons to
change values. Once you have entered a desired value, press 4 to highlight set and press 4 once more to
store the value and return to the previous menu. To exit the Edit screen without saving any changes, press
6.

5-8 SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES SBC-STAT3 MENUS

5.7 SBC-STAT3 MENUS

The SBC-STAT3 displays a menu system through which the user navigates using the SBC-STAT3 buttons.

There are four (4) menus, each of which provide different levels of monitoring and control. Along with their
default 4-digit passwords, they are as follows:

. User
. Install
. Balance
. Service

Sections 5.7.1 through 5.7.4 further describe the SBC-STAT3 menus.

5.7.1 USER MENU

The main menu is the User Menu. The User Menu can be reached by pressing the Select button (4) while
viewing the room temperature display.

User Override
Menu
Fahrenheit
Celsius

   

Figure 5-3: User Menu

From the User Menu, the user can press the up and down arrow buttons to highlight an entry. The entries
are Override, degrees Fahrenheit, and degrees Celsius. Highlight then press the Select button (4) to
initiate an action or enable/disable a function. Press the Escape button (6) to exit and return to the previous
menu.

NOTE
If the user selects Override while the + icon
is displayed, extended occupancy will be
canceled.

SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012) 5-9

SBC-STAT3 MENUS SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES

5.7.2 INSTALL MENU

To enter the Install Menu, press the Escape (6) and Up (s) buttons simultaneously. A password prompt will
appear. Enter your four digit password using the up and down arrow buttons. The default passwords are
as follows:

. User: No password required

. Install: 3300
. Balance: 2200
. Service: 1100
Press Select (4) to move each place to the right. Once you have selected the correct password press 4
one more time to enter the Install Menu.

Through the Install Menu, users can:

. View Ctrl Mon functions (further described in Section 5.7.2.1);
. Perform an LED Test (further described in Section 5.7.2.2);
. Monitor and edit the Properties of the SBC controller (further described in Section 5.7.2.3), and
. Reset the SBC-STAT3 and the SBC-VAV (further described in Section 5.7.2.4)

The menu display remains on for four minutes. The LED flashes yellow 15 seconds before the display
clears. Pressing any button while viewing the menu extends the time the menu is displayed. To exit out of
a menu press the 6 button until the room temperature screen is displayed.

Install Ctrl Monitor

Menu LED Test
Properties

   

Figure 5-4: Install Menu

5.7.2.1 CONTROL MONITOR

The first menu option listed in the Install Menu is Ctrl Monitor. This option allows the monitoring of
temperature and flow control operation.

5-10 SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES SBC-STAT3 MENUS

Temp 72.0 Flow 500

Setp 72.0 Targ 500
Zone Vent %Pos 50
Load 0

   

Figure 5-5: Control Monitor Screen 1

Sply 0.0
Sys Heating

   

Figure 5-6: Control Monitor Screen 2

5.7.2.2 LED TEST

A temporary option under the Install menu is LED test. This allows the installer to toggle the LED modes.
The modes are:
. Green
. Red
. Bright Red Flash
. Green Flash
. Slow Yellow Flash
. Yellow Flash
. Yellow.

5.7.2.3 PROPERTIES
This option gives the installer access to the Channels and Attributes of the connected controller. Press the
s and t arrow buttons to scroll through the attributes and to monitor the value of each attribute. Press the 4
to select the attribute, then you can scroll through all of the attributes for the selected channel. Also, new

SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012) 5-11

SBC-STAT3 MENUS SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES

values can be set for all read/write attributes. If an invalid value is entered, “ERROR” will appear. Figure 5-
7 shows a read only Properties screen and Figure 5-8 shows read/write Properties screen.

At the bottom of each Properties screen, the functions of each button are listed. These functions will
change as you navigate through each screen. For example, by pressing the 4 while viewing a read/write
attribute, the 4 button will have the following functions: attr, edit, next, and set.

Properties
FF00 SR 63810

esc attr down up

   

Figure 5-7 Read only Properties Screen

Properties
FE09 CV +0072.0

esc next down up

   

Figure 5-8: Read/Write Properties Screen

5.7.2.4 RESET
This option restarts the SBC Controller and the SBC-STAT3.

5-12 SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES SBC-STAT3 MENUS

5.7.3 BALANCE MENU

Through the Balance Menu, users can:

. View Ctrl Monitor functions (refer to Section 5.7.2.1);

. Perform Calibrate functions (further described in Section 5.7.3.1);
. Perform Damper Mode functions (further described in Section 5.7.3.7);
. Perform Flow Setpoint adjustments (further described in Section 5.7.3.8); and)
. Reset the SBC-STAT3 and the SBC-VAV (refer to Section 5.7.2.4)

To access the Balance Menu, press the 6 and the 4 buttons simultaneously. Enter your four digit password
using the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the numbers and Select (4) to move each place to
the right. Once you have selected the correct password press 4 one more time to enter the Balance Menu
screen (as shown in Figure 5-9).

SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012) 5-13

SBC-STAT3 MENUS SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES

5.7.3.1 CALIBRATE
Sections 5.5.0.0.2 through 5.5.0.0.6 describe the functions that can be performed from the Calibration
menu.

5.5.0.0.2 1ST MEASURED CFM

Single-point calibration uses 1st Measured CFM only. Here the measured airflow in CFM is entered during
the calibration process. Multi-point calibration uses two (2) CFM readings. The 1st Measured CFM
calculates the K Factor while the 2nd Measured CFM uses both readings to calculate the K Factor and the
Zero Offset.

5.5.0.0.3 2ND MEASURED CFM

When you enter the Calibrate Menu for the first time, there will be an X next to 2nd Measured CFM. This
marks the 2nd Measured CFM unavailable until a single-point calibration is performed. Once the single-
point calibration is performed a 4 appears next to the menu option. A 4 will also appear next to 2nd
Measured CFM after the multi-point calibration is performed. See Setting Values earlier in this section for
information on entering a value.

5.5.0.0.4 K FACTOR
For the initial SBC Controller setup, the K Factor can be estimated. Performing a field flow calibration is
required for precise flow measurement. After the calibration procedure is complete you can view the
precise K Factor by Selecting this option. For information on entering a value, see Setting Values earlier
in this section.

 Ctrl Monitor
Damper Mode 
Setpoints
Balance  Ctrl Monitor Reset
Menu Damper Mode 
Setpoints 

   

Figure 5-9: Balance Menu

5-14 SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES SBC-STAT3 MENUS

1st Meas CFM 

Cal 2nd Meas CFM
1st Meas CFM K Factor
Menu 2nd Meas CFM Z Offset
K Factor Zero CFM Cal 

   

Figure 5-10: Calibration Menu

5.5.0.0.5 Z OFFSET
Here you can view or set the Zero Offset value determined by the single- or multi-point calibration
process.

5.5.0.0.6 ZERO CFM CAL

Selecting this option opens a screen allowing you to press 4 to initiate the Zero Offset calibration. This
option is only used in single-point calibration.

5.7.3.7 DAMPER MODE

From this menu, users can change the Flow:Damper:Damper Mode [FA00;DM] attribute setting. The
Damper Modes are as follows:
. Controlled (Automatic)
. Full Open
. Min Cool
. Max Cool
. Min Heat
. Max Heat
. Min Warm-up
. Max Warm-up

NOTE
Only one mode can be selected at a time.

SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012) 5-15

SBC-STAT3 MENUS SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES

 Controlled 
Full Open
Min Cool
Damper  Controlled Max Cool
Mode Full Open Min Heat
Min Cool Max Heat
Min Warmup
Max Warmup 

   

Figure 5-11: Damper Mode Menu

Min Cool 
SP Max Cool
Min Cool Min Heat
Menu Max Cool Max Heat
Min Heat Min Warmup
Max Warmup 

   

Figure 5-12: Setpoints Menu

5.7.3.8 FLOW SETPOINTS

Through this menu, you can view and edit the following setpoints:

. Min Cool [Flow:Cooling:Cooling Minimum Flow (FA01;CM)]

. Max Cool [Flow:Cooling:Cooling Maximum Flow (FA01;CX)]
. Min Heat [Flow:Cooling:Heating Minimum Flow (FA01;HM)]
. Max Heat [Flow:Cooling:Heating Maximum Flow (FA01;HX)]
. Min Warm-up [Flow:Cooling:Warm-up Minimum Flow (FA01;WM)]
. Max Warm-up [Flow:Cooling:Warm-up Maximum Flow (FA01;WX)]

5-16 SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES SBC-STAT3 MENUS

5.7.4 SERVICE MENU

To enter the Service Menu press the Escape and Down (6t) buttons simultaneously. Enter your four digit
password using the up and down arrow buttons. Press the Select (4) to move each place to the right. Once

SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012) 5-17

SBC-STAT3 MENUS SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES

you have selected the correct password, press Select one more time to enter the Service Menu. The
default password for this menu is 1100.

Through the Service Menu, users can:

. View Ctrl Monitor functions (refer to Section 5.7.2.1);

. Adjust the temperature offset
. Select local or global temperature (further described in Section 5.7.4.1);
. Perform Temperature Setpoint adjustments (refer to Section 5.7.4.2);
. View Version information; (further described in 5.7.4.3); and
. Reset the SBC-STAT3 and the SBC-VAV.

5.7.4.1 LOCAL TEMP

This option toggles the multiple thermostat display between zone and individual modes.

5.7.4.2 TEMP OFFSET, COOLING SP, HEATING SP, OR WARM-UP SP

These options open an Edit screen allowing you to change a value. Use the up arrow button to toggle
between a negative (-) and positive (+) sign. Use the 4 button to move places to the right and the up and
down arrows to change a value. Once you have entered a desired value, press 4 to highlight set and press
4 once more to store the value and return to the Service Menu. To exit the Edit screen without saving any
changes, press 6.

Adjust
Cooling SP + 0072.0

esc next +/-

   

Figure 5-13 Cooling SP Screen

5-18 SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012)

SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES SBC-STAT3 MENUS

 Ctrl Monitor 
Temp Offset
Service Ctrl Monitor Local Temp
Menu Temp Offset Cooling SP
Local Temp Heating SP
Warmup SP
Version
Reset 
   

Figure 5-14 Service Menu

5.7.4.3 VERSION
This option displays:

. SBC controller’s Serial Number,

. The Version Number of the software,
. The Release Code,
. The Firmware Type,
. The Controller Type,
. The SBC controller’s Unit ID,
. The Thermostat Version, and
. The Global ID.

S/N 400002 Cont 102

Vers 1.11 ID 2
Rel 906594 Stat 1.02
Type 1 GID 1

   

Figure 5-15 Version Screen

SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012) 5-19

SBC-STAT3 MENUS SECTION 5: SBC-STAT FEATURES

5-20 SBC-VAV User Manual (4/12/2012)

 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES
The following tables contain a list of Public Unitary Protocol (PUP) attribute and channel
assignments for the SBC-VAVra, SBC-VAVrf, SBC-VAVta, and SBC-VAVtf.

Each attribute is given with its PUP channel assignment, PUP data type, access code, where it is
stored, its SoloPro for Windows location, and a brief description.

IN THIS SECTION
System Channel, FF00 ............................................................................................................................................ A-3
DAT Channel, FE08 ................................................................................................................................................. A-5
UI3 Channel, FE03 .................................................................................................................................................. A-6
UI2 Channel, FE02 .................................................................................................................................................. A-8
UI1 Channel, FE01 ................................................................................................................................................ A-10
Temperature Channel, FE00 .................................................................................................................................. A-12
AO Channel, FD01................................................................................................................................................. A-17
Occupancy Detection Channel, FC01.................................................................................................................... A-19
Digital Output Channel, FB01-FB05....................................................................................................................... A-20
Fan Channel, FB01 ................................................................................................................................................ A-21
PID Channel, FA11................................................................................................................................................. A-22
Valve Control 2 Channel, FA09 .............................................................................................................................. A-24
Valve Control 1 Channel, FA08 .............................................................................................................................. A-26
Flow Setpoints Channel, FA01............................................................................................................................... A-30
Indoor Air Quality, FA01 ......................................................................................................................................... A-31
Electric Reheat Channel, FA03 .............................................................................................................................. A-29
Flow Setpoints Channel, FA01............................................................................................................................... A-30
Indoor Air Quality, FA01 ......................................................................................................................................... A-31
Schedules Channels, F901-F906 .......................................................................................................................... A-34
Schedules Channel, F900...................................................................................................................................... A-35
Network Channel, F005 ......................................................................................................................................... A-37

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-1

 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

A-2 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES SYSTEM CHANNEL, FF00

SYSTEM CHANNEL, FF00

FF00 Store & SP for Windows
Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Back Up RAM Values

RAM
BU FE RW System/Power-up copies specific attribute values from RAM to EEPROM when set to 1: 0
0
= normal operation, 1 = back up RAM to EEPROM

Clock Fail Count

EE System/
CC FE RW increments upon hardware failure but can also be advanced during the
0 Diagnostics
removal of power

RAM
Controller Manufacturer
CM FE R Flash System/About
contains the factory-set manufacturer number for the unitary controller
255

Communication Speed
specifies the communication speed (baud rate) at which devices on this
network will communicate

0=9600
1=4800
EE Network/ 2=2400
CP FE RW
0 Configuration 3=1200
4=reserved
5=reserved
6=38.4K
7=19.2K
8=115.2K
9=57.6K

RAM
Controller Type
CT FE R Flash System/About
factory-set controller type identifies the type of unitary controller
102

RAM Default Enable

DE FE RW System/Power-up
0 this attribute is used to restore configuration settings to factory defaults

English/Metric specifies which units of measurement to use in returning

temperature and airflow values:
EE
EM FE RW System/About
0
0 = English Units;
1 = Metric Units

Token Recovery
EE enables Token Recovery. In a token passing environment there should
Network/
ER FE RW 0 always be network activity, but if a token is lost the network will fall
Configuration
Disabled silent. If Token Recovery is enabled, and a token is lost, Full
Administrator will detect the condition and initiate a new token.

RAM
Firmware Type
FT FE R Flash System/About
defines the class of firmware operating system used in this controller
1

EEPROM Default Count

EE System/
IC FE R increments whenever the EEPROM is restored to factory default
0 Diagnostics
settings (see FF00;DE Default Enable)

Unit Number
EE Network/
ID FE RW used to set a unique network address for each controller connected to a
Factory Set Configuration
multidrop

Trend Master unit number

Network/
MS specifies the unit ID of the SAGE area controller containing the trend
Configuration
information to be displayed on a connected STAT3.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-3

SYSTEM CHANNEL, FF00 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

FF00 Store & SP for Windows

Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Illegal Opcode Count

EE System/
OC FE RW increments upon firmware failure but can also be advanced during the
0 Diagnostics
removal of power

Power On Delay
EE time delay in seconds (0–255) that must elapse after the SBC-VAV is
PD FE RW System/Power-up
5 reset before output control or alarm functions can begin: 0 = no delay,
1–255 = delay specified in seconds

Power Up State
schedule state the SBC-VAV will operate in when it is initially powered or
the state that it will operate in when power is restored after a power
failure.
EE
PS FE RW System/Power-up
2
0=unoccupied
1=warm-up
2=occupied
3=night setback

Power-up Count
EE System/ increments each time power is applied to the controller. This counts
RC FE RW
0 Diagnostics power outages and noise related resets as well as resets initiated
through FF00;RS.

Reset the Controller?

RAM
RS FE RW System/Power-up used to reset the SBC-VAV: 0 = disabled (default), 1 = reset the SBC-
0
VAV

RAM Serial Number

SN FE R System/About
factory set displays the serial number of the SBC-VAV controller

RAM Flash Release Code

SR FE R System/About
Flash uniquely defines each flash firmware image

Token Passing Type

EE
defines the mode for token passing. When a controller is an
0
Network/ Irresponsible Peer it will always return a token to the device that passed
TP FE RW Irresponsib
Configuration it, after performing any pending transactions. In Full Administrator
le
mode, the token is passed to each unit listed in the Peer List (FF00;U1
Peer
through FF00;U4).

Peer Unit Number

EE Network/
U1-U4 FE RW defines the Unit ID of a peer. In Full Administrator mode the token is
65535 Configuration
passed to each unit in the Peer List.

EE System/ Flash Update Count increments each time a new flash firmware image
UP FE R
0 Diagnostics is accepted by the controller.

RAM Version Number

VE FA R System/About
Flash contains the factory-set firmware version

Watchdog Count
EE System/
WC FE RW increments upon firmware failure but can also be advanced during the
0 Diagnostics
removal of power

Zone Number
EE Network/
ZN FE RW from 0 to 65,535 used to group controllers so that they can be controlled
0 Configuration
simultaneously

MMT Pulse Count

RAM System/
ZP FE R advances when MMT takes action to maintain the operation of the
0 Diagnostics
actuator

A-4 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES DAT CHANNEL, FE08

DAT CHANNEL, FE08

FE08 Store & SP for Windows
Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Supply Temperature (UI1)

R
RAM Temperature/ shows the current value of source/duct temperature. This attribute is
CV FD (RW if
NA Thermostat used to select heating or cooling mode when FF00;BT is set to ‘Auto’.
OI = 1)
The offset adjustment FE08;OF is included in this value.

Auto Mode Dead Band

EE Temperature/ defines the temperature difference by which the supply air must either
DD FC RW
2.5°F Thermostat exceed the FE00;HC heating setpoint to switch to heating mode or fall
below the FE00;CC cooling setpoint to engage cooling mode

EE Temperature/ Supply Temperature Adjustment

OF FD RW
0 Thermostat defines an offset used to adjust FE08;CV

Override Supply Temperature?

EE Temperature/ allows the Supply Temperature (FE08;CV) to be altered manually
OI FE RW
0 Thermostat 0=No
1=Yes

Channel Reliability
indicates whether or not the Supply/Duct (DAT) values can be trusted
RAM Temperature/
RE FE R
NA Thermostat
0=Reliable
1=Unreliable

Supply Mode
RAM Temperature/ indicates that supply air is suitable for heating or cooling
SM FE R
NA Thermostat
0=Cooling

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-5

UI3 CHANNEL, FE03 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

UI3 CHANNEL, FE03

FE03 Store & SP for Windows
Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Alarm Enable
specifies the type of alarm checking to be done on the FE03;CV value

0=Disabled
EE I/O Setup/Input 1=Contact (01)
AE FE RW
0 (UI3) 2=Contact (10)
3=Contact (10)
4=Low limit
5=High limit
6=Low/high limit

Alarm Status
shows the current alarm condition

0=No alarm
RAM I/O Setup/Input 1=Contact (01)
AS FE R
0 (UI3) 2=Contact (10)
3=Change of state
4=Unused
5=Low limit
6=High limit

RAM I/O Setup/Input Source Temperature

CV FD RW
NA (UI3) shows the current value of source/duct temperature

EE I/O Setup/Input Data Type for Input

DT FE RW
253 (UI3) specifies the PUP data type for the input

High Alarm Limit

EE I/O Setup/Input
HL FD RW if alarms are enabled and the current value rises above this value, a
0.0 (UI3)
high limit alarm will be generated

EE I/O Setup/Input Alarm Limit Hysteresis determines when the SBC-VAV returns from a
HS FD RW
0.0 (UI3) high or low limit alarm

Input Filter Delay

EE I/O Setup/Input specifies the amount of time in tenths of seconds during which an input
IF FE RW
0.0 (UI3) configured as digital input must remain stable for the value to be
considered reliable

Input Polarity
specifies the input polarity when the input is configured as a digital input
EE I/O Setup/Input
IP FE RW
0 (UI2)
0=Normal
1=Reverse

Low Alarm Limit

EE I/O Setup/Input
LL FD RW specifies the maximum engineering unit for the input corresponding to
0.0 (UI3)
the highest value measured at the input connection

Minimum Scaled Value

EE I/O Setup/Input
MN FD RW specifies the minimum engineering unit for the input corresponding to
0.0 (UI3)
the lowest value measured at the input connection

Maximum Scaled Value

EE I/O Setup/Input
MX FD RW specifies the minimum engineering unit for the input corresponding to
0.0 (UI3)
the lowest value measured at the input connection

Override Input
allows a host or operator to directly set the value of the source/duct
EE I/O Setup/Input temperature
OI FE RW
0 (UI3)
0=No
1=Yes

A-6 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES UI3 CHANNEL, FE03

FE03 Store & SP for Windows

Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Data Reliability
an analog input value is considered unreliable if it is out of range for the
RAM I/O Setup/Input selected sensor type
RE FE R
NA (UI3)
0=Reliable
1=Unreliable

Sensor Type
selects one of the following input types:
EE I/O Setup/Input
ST FE RW 0= digital
7 (UI3)
2= full scale, linear -5V dc or 0-20mA scaled from MN to MX
3= 4–20mA liner scaled from MN to MX
7= -22.0 to 122.0×F thermistor

Amount of Setup/Setback Alarm Limit

EE I/O Setup/Input
SU FD RW specifies the amount added to FE04;HL or subtracted from FE04;LL
0.0 (UI3)
during unoccupied periods

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-7

UI2 CHANNEL, FE02 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

UI2 CHANNEL, FE02

FE02 Store & SP for Windows
Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Alarm Enable
specifies the type of alarm checking to be done on the FE02;CV value

0=Disabled
EE I/O Setup/Input 1=Contact (01)
AE FE RW
0 (UI2) 2=Contact (10)
3=Contact (10)
4=Low limit
5=High limit
6=Low/high limit

Alarm Status
shows the current alarm condition

0=No alarm
RAM I/O Setup/Input 1=Contact (01)
AS FE R
0 (UI2) 2=Contact (10)
3=Change of state
4=Unused
5=Low limit
6=High limit

RAM I/O Setup/Input Source Temperature

CV FD RW
NA (UI2) shows the current value of source/duct temperature

EE I/O Setup/Input Data Type for Input

DT FE RW
253 (UI2) specifies the PUP data type for the input

High Alarm Limit

EE I/O Setup/Input
HL FD RW if alarms are enabled and the current value rises above this value, a
0.0 (UI2)
high limit alarm will be generated

EE I/O Setup/Input Alarm Limit Hysteresis determines when the SBC-VAV returns from a
HS FD RW
0.0 (UI2) high or low limit alarm

Input Filter Delay

EE I/O Setup/Input specifies the amount of time in tenths of seconds during which an input
IF FE RW
0.0 (UI2) configured as digital input must remain stable for the value to be
considered reliable

Input Polarity
specifies the input polarity when the input is configured as a digital input
EE I/O Setup/Input
IP FE RW
0 (UI2)
0=Normal
1=Reverse

Low Alarm Limit

EE I/O Setup/Input
LL FD RW specifies the maximum engineering unit for the input corresponding to
0.0 (UI2)
the highest value measured at the input connection

Minimum Scaled Value

EE I/O Setup/Input
MN FD RW specifies the minimum engineering unit for the input corresponding to
0.0 (UI2)
the lowest value measured at the input connection

Maximum Scaled Value

EE I/O Setup/Input
MX FD RW specifies the minimum engineering unit for the input corresponding to
0.0 (UI2)
the lowest value measured at the input connection

Override Input
allows a host or operator to directly set the value of the source/duct
EE I/O Setup/Input temperature
OI FE RW
0 (UI2)
0=No
1=Yes

A-8 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES UI2 CHANNEL, FE02

FE02 Store & SP for Windows

Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Data Reliability
an analog input value is considered unreliable if it is out of range for the
RAM I/O Setup/Input selected sensor type
RE FE R
NA (UI2)
0=Reliable
1=Unreliable

Sensor Type
selects one of the following input types:
EE I/O Setup/Input
ST FE RW 0= digital
7 (UI2)
2= full scale, linear -5V dc or 0-20mA scaled from MN to MX
3= 4–20mA liner scaled from MN to MX
7= -22.0 to 122.0×F thermistor

Amount of Setup/Setback Alarm Limit

EE I/O Setup/Input
SU FD RW specifies the amount added to FE04;HL or subtracted from FE04;LL
0.0 (UI2)
during unoccupied periods

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-9

UI1 CHANNEL, FE01 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

UI1 CHANNEL, FE01

FE01 Store & SP for Windows
Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Alarm Enable
specifies the type of alarm checking to be done on the FE01;CV value

0=Disabled
EE I/O Setup/Input 1=Contact (01)
AE FE RW
0 (UI1) 2=Contact (10)
3=Contact (10)
4=Low limit
5=High limit
6=Low/high limit

Alarm Status
shows the current alarm condition

0=No alarm
RAM I/O Setup/Input 1=Contact (01)
AS FE R
0 (UI1) 2=Contact (10)
3=Change of state
4=Unused
5=Low limit
6=High limit

RAM I/O Setup/Input Source Temperature shows the current value of source/duct
CV FD RW
NA (UI1) temperature

EE I/O Setup/Input Data Type for Input

DT FE RW
253 (UI1) specifies the PUP data type for the input

I/O Setup/Input High Alarm Limit

EE
HL FD RW (UI1) if alarms are enabled and the current value rises above this value, a
0.0
high limit alarm will be generated

EE I/O Setup/Input Alarm Limit Hysteresis determines when the SBC-VAV returns from a
HS FD RW
0.0 (UI1) high or low limit alarm

Input Filter Delay

EE I/O Setup/Input specifies the amount of time in tenths of seconds during which an input
IF FE RW
0.0 (UI1) configured as digital input must remain stable for the value to be
considered reliable

Input Polarity specifies the input polarity when the input is configured
as a digital input
EE I/O Setup/Input
IP FE RW
0 (UI1)
0=Normal
1=Reverse

Low Alarm Limit

EE I/O Setup/Input
LL FD RW specifies the maximum engineering unit for the input corresponding to
0.0 (UI1)
the highest value measured at the input connection

Minimum Scaled Value specifies the minimum engineering unit for the
EE I/O Setup/Input
MN FD RW input corresponding to the lowest value measured at the input
0.0 (UI1)
connection

Maximum Scaled Value specifies the minimum engineering unit for the
EE I/O Setup/Input
MX FD RW input corresponding to the lowest value measured at the input
0.0 (UI1)
connection

Override Input allows a host or operator to directly set the value of the
source/duct temperature
EE I/O Setup/Input
OI FE RW
0 (UI1)
0=No
1=Yes

A-10 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES UI1 CHANNEL, FE01

FE01 Store & SP for Windows

Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Data Reliability
an analog input value is considered unreliable if it is out of range for the
RAM I/O Setup/Input selected sensor type
RE FE R
NA (UI1)
0=Reliable
1=Unreliable

Sensor Type selects one of the following input types:

EE I/O Setup/Input 0= digital

ST FE RW
7 (UI1) 2= full scale, linear -5V dc or 0-20mA scaled from MN to MX
3= 4–20mA liner scaled from MN to MX
7= -22.0 to 122.0×F thermistor

Amount of Setup/Setback Alarm Limit

EE I/O Setup/Input
SU FD RW specifies the amount added to FE04;HL or subtracted from FE04;LL
0.0 (UI1)
during unoccupied periods

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-11

TEMPERATURE CHANNEL, FE00 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

TEMPERATURE CHANNEL, FE00

FE00 Store & SP for Windows
Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Enable Alarming
specifies the type of alarm checking to be done on the CV value
EE Temperature/
AE FE RW 0=disabled
0 Alarms
4=low limit
5=high limit
6=Low/High Limit

Alarm Status
shows the current alarm condition
RAM Temperature/
AS FE R
0 Alarms 0=No Alarm
5=low limit
6=high limit

Bus Mode
EE Temperature/ should be set to Master (FE00;BM=0) unless multiple controllers are
BM FE RW
0 Sensor Bus wired onto a SSB. Any additional controllers on the SSB must be
configured as Slaves (FE00;BM=1).

VAV Control Mode

this attribute specifies the type of VAV terminal box being used
EE
1 Temperature/ 0=None (CAV)
BT FE RW
cooling Thermostat 1=Cooling Only
only 2=Heating Only
3=Supply Dependant (VST)
4=Cooling w/reheat

RAM Temperature/ Current Setpoint

CC FD R
NA Cooling Setpoints this attribute shows the current cooling control setpoint

Temperature/ Current Setpoint

CH FD R RAM
Heating Setpoints this attribute shows the current heating control setpoint

RAM Temperature/ Current Value

CV FD RW
NA Alarms shows the current value of the input

Display Format
defines the format used to display the current temperature on the digital
thermostat. The display of the tenths digit and the Fahrenheit/Celsius
character are options. Also, the display may be eliminated.
EE
Temperature/
DF FE RW 3
Sensor Bus 0=##d
##.#
1=##.#d
2=##df
3=##.#df
4=None

Demand Load
RAM Temperature/
DL FD R indicates the heating/cooling demand of the zone in terms of the
NA Thermostat
temperature separation from setpoints

RAM Temperature/ Zone Demand

DM FE R
NA Thermostat indicates the demand for the zone

Display Mode
specifies whether English or Metric units are to be used for the digital
EE
Temperature/ thermostat display
DS FE RW 0
Sensor Bus
degrees F
0=Fahrenheit
1=Celsius

A-12 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES TEMPERATURE CHANNEL, FE00

FE00 Store & SP for Windows

Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Display Value,
EE Temperature/ when FE00;DV=0 each digital thermostat displays the identical
DV FE RW
0 Sensor Bus temperature value (average) (FE00;ZT). When FE00;DV=1 each
thermostat displays its own temperature

Extended Occupancy Duration

EE Temperature/
ED FE RW this attribute specifies the amount of time in minutes to extend
60 minutes Override
occupancy

Extended Occupancy Remaining

RAM Temperature/
ER FE R this attribute shows the amount of time remaining in extended
NA Override
occupancy

Enable Flow/Energy Totalization when enabled (ET = 1), SBC-VAV

will calculate expended flow and energy provided that universal input
EE FE04 is used as a duct temperature sensor; energy totalization is invalid
ET FE RW System/Statistics
0 in any other circumstance
0=No
1=Yes

RAM Temperature/ GID Device 0

G0 FE R
NA Sensor Bus the global identification for the SSB device

RAM Temperature/ GID Device 1

G1 FE R
NA Sensor Bus the global identification for the SSB device

RAM Temperature/ GID Device 2

G2 FE R
NA Sensor Bus the global identification for the SSB device

RAM Temperature/ GID Device 3

G3 FE R
NA Sensor Bus the global identification for the SSB device

High Alarm Limit

EE Temperature/
HL FD RW if alarms are enabled and the current value rises above this value, a
0.0 Alarms
high limit alarm will be generated

EE Temperature/ Alarm Limit Hysteresis determines when the SBC-VAV returns from a
HS FD RW
0.0 Alarms high or low limit alarm

Low Alarm Limit

EE Temperature/
LL FD RW if alarms are enabled and the current value drops below this value, a low
0.0 Alarms
limit alarm will be generated

Night Setback this attribute specifies, in +/- degrees, the amount to be

EE Temperature/
NC FD RW added to the cooling setpoint (FE00;SC) when the SBC-VAV is in night
5.0 Cooling Setpoints
setback mode

Night Setback
EE Temperature/
NH FD RW specifies, in +/- degrees, the amount to be added to the heating setpoint
10.0°F Heating Setpoints
(FE00;SH) when the SBC-VAV is in night setback mode

Accumulated Extended Occupancy Time

RAM
OA FE RW System/Statistics shows the total amount of time that the SBC-VAV has spent in extended
0
occupancy

EE Temperature/ Temperature Correction

OF FD RW
0 Thermostat this defines the correction that is being applied to temperature readings

Override Temperature Value?

allows you to write to FE00;ZT directly
EE Temperature/
OI FE RW
0 Thermostat
0=No
1=Yes

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-13

TEMPERATURE CHANNEL, FE00 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

FE00 Store & SP for Windows

Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

EE Temperature/ Balancer P.I.N.

PB FE RW
2200 Sensor Bus this personal identification number controls access to the Balance Menu

Primary GID
Specifies the GID of the Primary thermostat in Primary GID mode
EE Temperature/
PG FE RW (RM=8). If this
NA Sensor Bus
thermostat is not available then the Average temperature mode (RM=0)
is used.

EE Temperature/ Installer P.I.N.

PI FE RW
3300 Sensor Bus this Personal Identification Number controls access to all menus.

EE Temperature/ Service P.I.N.

PS FE RW
1100 Sensor Bus this personal identification number controls access to the Service Menu

EE
Temperature/ User P.I.N.
PU FE RW 0000
Sensor Bus this personal identification number controls access to the User Menu

Reading Mode
specifies the technique used to determine Zone Temperature when
multiple thermostats are present. 0=Average mode (default)

1=Highest
EE Temperature 2=Lowest
RM FE RW
0 Sensor Bus 3=Hi/Lo VST mode
4=Device 0
5=Device 1
6=Device 2
7=Device 3
8=Primary GID

Reset Totals? used to reset TF and TE to 0, restarting the totalization

process
RAM
RT FE RW System/Statistics
0
0=No
1=Yes

EE Temperature/ Cooling Setpoint

SC FD RW
72.0 Cooling Setpoints shows the zone temperature setpoint desired to begin cooling control

Calculated Setpoint Display

specifies what method is used to display setpoint adjustments on an
SBC-STAT3 LCD screen.
EE Temperature/ 0 = Disable (+/-2.5)
SD FE RW
0 Setpoint Adjust 1 = Zone Midpoint (FE00;ZS)
2 = Heating Setpoint (FE00;CH)
3 = Cooling Setpoint (FE00;CC)t

User Override
this attribute enables or disables your ability to enter extended
EE Temperature/ occupancy
SE FE RW
1 enables Override
0=Disabled
1=Enabled

Heating Setpoint
EE Temperature/
SH FD RW this attribute shows the zone temperature setpoint desired to begin
68.0°F Heating Setpoints
heating control

EE Temperature/ Amount to Setup/Setback Alarm Limit specifies the amount added to

SU FC RW
0.0 Alarms HL or subtracted from LL during unoccupied periods

Warm-up Setpoint
EE Temperature/
SW FD RW shows the zone temperature setpoint desired for beginning warm-up
72.0°F Heating Setpoints
heating control

A-14 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES TEMPERATURE CHANNEL, FE00

FE00 Store & SP for Windows

Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

RAM Temperature/ Reading Device 0

T0 FD R
NA Sensor Bus the raw reading for Device 1 on a SSB

RAM Temperature/ Reading Device 1

T1 FD R
NA Sensor Bus the raw reading for Device 2 on a SSB

RAM Temperature/ Reading Device 2

T2 FD R
NA Sensor Bus the raw reading for Device 3 on a SSB

RAM Temperature/ Reading Device 3

T3 FD R
NA Sensor Bus the raw reading for Device 4 on a SSB

Total Accumulated Energy

RAM
specifies the total amount of energy in BTUs (or kilojoules) that have
TE FE RW *1 System/Statistics
been used by the terminal box (from 0 to 4,294,967,295) since the last
NA
time TE was reset

Total Accumulated Flow

RAM
specifies the total number of cubic feet (or liters) of airflow (from 0 to
TF FE RW *1 System/Statistics
4,294,967,29) that have passed through the primary (cooling) duct since
NA
the last time TF was reset

User Adjust Increment

EE Temperature/
TM FD RW this attribute specifies the magnitude of incremental changes to the User
0.5°F Setpoint Adjust
Setpoint Offset (FE00;TS)

User Adjust Position

RAM Temperature/
TP FF RW the User Setpoint Offset (FE00;TS) can be raised or lowered in integral
0 Setpoint Adjust
steps; the FE00;TP attribute tracks the current step

RAM Temperature/ User Adjust Remaining displays the time remaining before the User
TR FE RW
0 Setpoint Adjust Setpoint Offset (FE00;TS) setting is reset

RAM Temperature/ User Setpoint Offset

TS FD RW
0 Setpoint Adjust this attribute defines an offset to be applied to PID setpoints

User Setpoint Offset

EE
Temperature/ the User Setpoint Offset (FE00;TS) is a a temporary setting; the
TT FE RW 120
Setpoint Adjust FE00;TT attribute defines in minutes the duration for which the setting
minutes
applies

Unoccupied Setback
EE Temperature/ this attribute specifies, +/- degrees, the amount to be added to the
UC FD RW
5.0 Cooling Setpoints cooling setpoint (FE00;SC) when the SBC-VAV schedule is in
unoccupied mode

Unoccupied Setback
EE Temperature/
UH FD RW specifies, in +/- degrees, the amount to be added to the heating setpoint
10.0°F Heating Setpoints
(FE00;SH) when the SBC-VAV is in unoccupied mode

RAM Temperature/ Zone Midpoint displays the midpoint between the current cooling and
ZS FD RW
70.0 Setpoint Adjust heating setpoints.

R
Zone Temperature
(RW if RAM Temperature/
ZT FD shows the current temperature value measured by the thermostat as
FE00; NA Thermostat
adjusted by FE00;OF
OI = 1)

RAM Aux/Relative Relative Humidity

RH FE R
NA Humidity shows the current sensed relatve humidity from a connected SBC-RHT.

Display Relative Humidity

EE Aux/Relative
HD FE RW indicates if relative humidity should be displayed on the LCD of the
0 Humidity
SBC-RHT.

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-15

TEMPERATURE CHANNEL, FE00 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

FE00 Store & SP for Windows

Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

EE Aux/Relatve Relative Humidity Correction

HC FD RW
0.0 Humidity defines a correction offset for the sensed relative humidity.

EE Aux/Relative Override Relative Humidity?

HO FE RW
0 Humidity permits overrides to the relative humidity.

A-16 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES AO CHANNEL, FD01

AO CHANNEL, FD01
FD01 Store & SP for Windows
Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Automatic/Manual Control
selects the control mode for the analog output
EE I/O Setup/Output
AM FE RW
0 (AO1)
0=Manual
1=Automatic

RAM I/O Setup/Output Current Output Value

CV FD RW
0.0 (AO1) shows the current value of the analog output

EE I/O Setup/Output Data Type for Output

DT FE RW
252 (AO1) specifies the PUP data type for the analog output

Maximum Scaled Voltage

EE I/O Setup/Output
HS FA RW specifies the actual analog output value for a FD01;CV value of
100.0 (AO1)
FD01;MX

Minimum Scaled Voltage

EE I/O Setup/Output
LS FA RW specifies the actual analog output value for a FD01;CV value of
0.00 (AO1)
FDO1;MX

Minimum Scaled Value

EE I/O Setup/Output
MN FD RW specifies the minimum scaled value for the analog output corresponding
0.0 (AO1)
to the lowest value output

Maximum Scaled Value

EE I/O Setup/Output
MX FD RW specifies the maximum scaled value for the analog output
100.0 (AO1)
corresponding to the highest value output

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-17

PROOF OF FLOW CHANNEL, FC02 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

PROOF OF FLOW CHANNEL, FC02

FC02 SP for Windows
Data Type Access Store & Value Description
Attr. Location

Method
defines the requirements for proof of flow
EE
DR FE RW Flow/Proof of Flow 0=None
1
1=Minimum Flow
2=Digital Input
3=Both

Status Input
Selects the input where a non-zero value indicates flow
EE
IC FE RW Flow/Proof of Flow
0=None
1=UI1
2=UI2

EE Minimum Required Flow

MF FE RW Flow/Proof of Flow
75 the minimum flow reading required in order to indicate positive flow

Flow Proof Delay

EE
PD FE RW Flow/Proof of Flow Shows the amount of time, in seconds, imposed before enabling a
60
positive flow indication

Proof of Flow
shows the status of the proof of flow
RAM
PF FE R Flow/Proof of Flow
0
0=No Flow
1=Flow

A-18 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES OCCUPANCY DETECTION CHANNEL, FC01

OCCUPANCY DETECTION CHANNEL, FC01

FC01 Store & SP for Windows
Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Status Input
enables occupancy detection and specifies the binary input channel to
be used for detection
EE Aux/Occupancy
IC FE RW
0 Detector
0=None
1=UI1
2=UI2

Extended Occupancy Delay

EE Aux/Occupancy
MD FE RW sets the amount of time, in seconds, during which the occupancy
30 Detector
detector must remain on before it will override the zone

RAM Aux/Occupancy Extended Occupancy Remaining

MR FE R
NA Detector displays the time remaining for occupancy detector override

Occupancy Status
RAM Aux/Occupancy shows the status of the occupancy detector digital input
MS FE R
NA Detector 0=No Detection
1=Detection

Extended Occupancy Duration

EE Aux/Occupancy
MT FE RW defines, in minutes, the length of time to override the zone whenever
0 Detector
motion is detected

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-19

DIGITAL OUTPUT CHANNEL, FB01-FB05 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

DIGITAL OUTPUT CHANNEL, FB01-FB05

FB01-
Store & SP for Windows
FB05 Data Type Access Description
Default Location
Attr.

RAM I/O Setup/Triac Current Value

CV FE RW
NA Outputs shows the current value for the analog output

Override
EE overrides the digital output. On (;OI=1) constantly energizes the output; Off
I/O Setup/Triac
OI FE RW 0 (;OI=0) disables the output; Auto (;OI=2) allows for automatic control; Manual
Outputs
Off (;OI=3) allows the CV to be directly written.

Output Polarity
allows you to change the polarity of the output
EE I/O Setup/Triac
OP FE RW
0 Outputs
0=Normal
1=Reverse

Runtime Hours
RAM I/O Setup/Triac
RH FC RW shows the total amount of time, in hours, during which the output has
* Outputs
been energized

EE I/O Setup/Triac Runtime Limit

RL FC RW
0.0 Outputs specifies a run time limit in hours for the output

A-20 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES FAN CHANNEL, FB01

FAN CHANNEL, FB01

FB01 Store & SP for Windows
Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Fan
defines the status of the fan output
RAM
CV FE RW Aux/Fan
NA
0=Off
1=On

EE Minimum Cycle Time shows the minimum amount of time, in minutes,

FC FC RW Aux/Fan
0 during which the fan output will stay energized or de-energized

Fan/Damper Mode
used to configure the fan or damper
EE
FO FE RW Aux/Fan 0=No Fan/Ind Damp
0
1=Series Fan
2=Parallel Fan
3=Induction Damper

EE Fan Setpoint used to set the parallel fan, induction damper or constant
FS FE RW Aux/Fan
0 volume setpoint (cfm)

Series Fan Unoccupied Mode

shows the status of the series fan during the unoccupied schedule state
EE
SF FE RW Aux/Fan
0
0=Always On
1=Off in Deadband

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-21

PID CHANNEL, FA11 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

PID CHANNEL, FA11

Store
FA11 SP for Windows
Data Type Access & Description
Attr. Location
Value

RAM Analog Output Value

AO FD RW Aux/PID Control
NA shows the scaled output value used by the analog output

Control Enabled?
enables the PID loop
EE
CE FE RW Aux/PID Control
0
0=No
1=Yes

RAM Control Setpoint

CS FD R Aux/PID Control
NA shows the actual loop control setpoint

Dead band
EE
DB FC RW Aux/PID Control specifies the input variable range over which the output value is
0
proportional to the error value

Input channel
specifies the input to be used for the measured variable for the control
loop

0=Disabled
EE 1=Zone Temp
IC FE RW Aux/PID Control
0 2=Supply Temp
3=Flow
4=UI1
5=UI2
9=Zone Heating
10=Zone Cooling

RAM Input Channel Value

IN FC R Aux/PID Control
0 displays the value of the input selected in FA04;IC

Maximum Reset
EE
MR FD RW Aux/PID Control specifies the maximum amount by which to reset the loop setpoint (SP)
0
when reset is being used

Proportional Band
EE
PB FC RW Aux/PID Control specifies the input variable range over which the output value is
0
proportional to the error value

RAM Percent Output Value

PO FC RW Aux/PID Control
NA shows the output value in hundredths of a percent

RAM Reset Variable Value

RC FC R Aux/PID Control
NA displays the value of the input selected in RV

EE Limit for Maximum Reset

RL FC RW Aux/PID Control
0 specifies the value at which maximum reset is used

Reset Period
EE
RP FE RW Aux/PID Control specifies the reset period (in seconds) over which the error history is
0
accumulated

EE Reset Setpoint
RS FC RW Aux/PID Control
0 specifies the value at which the reset action begins

Rate
EE
RT FC RW Aux/PID Control specifies a percentage of change in error that is to be used in calculating
0
FA04;PO

A-22 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES PID CHANNEL, FA11

Store
FA11 SP for Windows
Data Type Access & Description
Attr. Location
Value

Reset Variable
specifies the input to be used for calculating the reset

0=disabled
EE
RV FE RW Aux/PID Control 1=Zone Temp
0
2=Supply Temp
3=Flow
4=UI1
5=UI2

Control Sign
specifies the control action for the control loop
EE
SG FE RW Aux/PID Control
0
0=Normal
1=Reverse

EE Loop Setpoint
SP FD RW Aux/PID Control
0 specifies the desired loop setpoint

Setup/Setback
EE
SU FC RW Aux/PID Control specifies the amount to add (if SG = 0) or subtract (if SG = 1) from the
0
setpoint during an unoccupied period

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-23

VALVE CONTROL 2 CHANNEL, FA09 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

VALVE CONTROL 2 CHANNEL, FA09

FA09 SP for Windows
Data Type Access Store & Value Description
Attr. Location

Auto/Manual Mode
selects the control mode for the valve output(s)
EE Aux/Valve Control/
AM FE RW
0 2
0=Manual
1=Automatic

Change Valve Direction

used to set the direction of the valve outputs
EE Aux/Valve Control/
CD FE RW
0 2
0=Normal
1=Reverse

Pulse Duration Period

EE
PP FE RW Aux/Valve Control shows the amount of time, in seconds, that the valve is to be pulsed ON
0
when PE = 1 or pulse width modulation is enabled

Recalibrate Interval
shows the amount of time, in hours, between valve recalibrations.
EE Aux/Valve Control/
RI FE RW Calibration is disabled when RI = 0. This point defaults to 0. Note that if
0 2
RI = 0 and a power failure occurs, the valve will not be recalibrated upon
power-up.

Valve Status
indicates the status of the valve channel
RAM Aux/Valve Control/
ST FE R 0=Off
NA 2
1=Open
2=Close
3=Calibrate

DAT High Temp Lockout

EE Aux/Valve Control/ Heating stages will be engaged only if there is a Reliable Source/Duct
TH FD RW
105.0 2 Temperature DAT below this setting. If a supply temperature sensor is
not present, set this attribute to 999.0.

DAT Low Temp Lockout

Defines the minimum Source/Duct Temperature (DAT - Discharge Air
EE Aux/Valve Control/
TL FD RW Temperature) below which cooling will be disengaged. This offers
45.0 2
protection against freeze up. If a supply temperature sensor is not
present, set this attribute to 999.0.

EE Aux/Valve Control/ Update Threshold

UT FE RW
5 2 used to minimize the actuation of the value for the insignificant changes

RAM Aux/Valve Control/ Actual Valve Position

VA FE R
NA 2 shows the actual valve position based on travel time.

Desired Valve Position

RAM Aux/Valve Control/
VD FE RW shows the desired valve position at which the loop should control the
NA 2
valve in order to bring the measured input variable closer to the setpoint

EE Aux/Valve Control/ Valve Integration Constant shows the amount of proportional error
VI FC RW
0.0 2 history (0 to 100%) used to calculate the desired position for the valve

Valve Mode
EE Aux/Valve Control/
VM FE RW 0=PWM
0 2
1=Floating Point Motor Control

EE Aux/Valve Control/ Valve Offset

VO FC RW
0.0 2 used to configure the valve mode

Valve Proportional Band

EE Aux/Valve Control/
VP FC RW specifies the input variable range, in degrees (0.0 to 25.5), over which
5.0 2
the output is proportional to the error value

A-24 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES VALVE CONTROL 2 CHANNEL, FA09

FA09 SP for Windows

Data Type Access Store & Value Description
Attr. Location

Valve Travel Time

EE Aux/Valve Control/
VT FE RW shows the amount of time, in seconds, that it takes the valve motor to
180 2
travel from a fully closed position to a fully opened one

Valve Use
options are disabled, cooling and heating
EE Aux/Valve Control/
VU FE RW
0 2 0=Disabled
1=Cooling
2=Heating

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-25

VALVE CONTROL 1 CHANNEL, FA08 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

VALVE CONTROL 1 CHANNEL, FA08

FA08 SP for Windows
Data Type Access Store & Value Description
Attr. Location

Auto/Manual Mode
selects the control mode for the valve output(s)
EE Aux/Valve Control/
AM FE RW
0 1
0=Manual
1=Automatic

Change Valve Direction

used to set the direction of the valve outputs
EE Aux/Valve Control/
CD FE RW
0 1
0=Normal
1=Reverse

Pulse Duration Period

EE Aux/Valve Control/
PP FE RW shows the amount of time, in seconds, that the valve is to be pulsed ON
0 1
when PE = 1 or pulse width modulation is enabled

Recalibrate Interval
shows the amount of time, in hours, between valve recalibrations.
EE Aux/Valve Control/
RI FE RW Calibration is disabled when RI = 0. This point defaults to 0. Note that if
0 1
RI = 0 and a power failure occurs, the valve will not be recalibrated upon
power-up.

Valve Status
indicates the status of the valve channel
RAM Aux/Valve Control/
ST FE R 0=Off
NA 1
1=Open
2=Close
3=Calibrate

DAT High Temp Lockout

EE Aux/Valve Control/ heating stages will be energized only if there is a reliable source/duct
TH FD RW
105.0 1 temperature. If a supply temperature sensor is not present, set this
attribute to 999.0.

DAT Low Temp Lockout

EE Aux/Valve Control/ the minimum source/duct temperature below which cooling will be
TL FD RW
45.0 1 disengaged. This offers protection against freeze-up. If a supply
temperature sensor is not present, set this attribute to 999.0.

EE Aux/Valve Control/ Update Threshold

UT FE RW
5 1 used to minimize the actuation of the value for the insignificant changes

RAM Aux/Valve Control/ Actual Valve Position

VA FE R
NA 1 shows the actual valve position based on travel time.

Desired Valve Position

RAM Aux/Valve Control/
VD FE RW shows the desired valve position at which the loop should control the
NA 1
valve in order to bring the measured input variable closer to the setpoint

Aux/Valve Control/ Valve Integration Constant

EE
VI FC RW 1 shows the amount of proportional error history (0 to 100%) used to
0.0
calculate the desired position for the valve

Valve Mode
EE Aux/Valve Control/
VM FE RW 0=PWM
0 1
1=Floating Point Motor Control

EE Aux/Valve Control/
VO FC RW Valve Offset used to configure the valve mode
0.0 1

Valve Proportional Band

EE Aux/Valve Control/
VP FC RW specifies the input variable range, in degrees (0.0 to 25.5), over which
5.0 1
the output is proportional to the error value

A-26 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES VALVE CONTROL 1 CHANNEL, FA08

FA08 SP for Windows

Data Type Access Store & Value Description
Attr. Location

Valve Travel Time

EE Aux/Valve Control/
VT FE RW shows the amount of time, in seconds, that it takes the valve motor to
180 1
travel from a fully closed position to a fully opened one

Valve Use
options are disabled, cooling and heating
EE Aux/Valve Control/
VU FE RW
0 1 0=Disabled
1=Cooling
2=Heating

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-27

FLOW ALARM CHANNEL, FA05 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

FLOW ALARM CHANNEL, FA05

FA05 SP for Windows
Data Type Access Store & Value Description
Attr. Location

Alarm Enable specifies the type of alarm checking to be done on the

CV value
EE
AE FE RW Flow/Alarms 0=Disable
0
4=Low Limit
5=High Limit
6=Low/High Limit

Alarm Status
shows the current alarm condition
RAM
AS FE R Flow/Alarms
0 0=No Alarm
5=Low Limit
6=High Limit

R
RAM Current Value
CV FE (RW if Flow/Alarms
NA shows the current measured amount of airflow in cfm
OI = 1)

High Alarm Limit

EE
HL FE RW Flow/Alarms if alarms are enabled and the current value rises above this value, a
0
high limit alarm will be generated

EE Alarm Limit Hysteresis determines when the SBC-VAV returns from a

HS FE RW Flow/Alarms
0 high or low limit alarm

Low Alarm Limit

EE
LL FE RW Flow/Alarms if alarms are enabled and the current value drops below this value, a low
0
limit alarm will be generated

EE Alarm Limit Setup/Setback specifies the amount added to HL or

SU FE RW Flow/Alarms
0 subtracted from LL during unoccupied periods

A-28 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES ELECTRIC REHEAT CHANNEL, FA03

ELECTRIC REHEAT CHANNEL, FA03

Store
FA03 SP for Windows
Data Type Access & Description
Attr. Location
Value

Require Max Airflow

EE Aux/Electric
AF FE RW if set to “Yes” (FA03;AF = 1), this holds off the addition of reheat stages
1 Reheat
until the PID loop is calling for maximum airflow

RAM Aux/Electric Available Stages

AV FE R
NA Reheat displays the stages that are currently available for use

Balance Stage Usage

EE Aux/Electric if set to “Yes” (FA03;BA = 1), this attribute considers the Run Hour
BA FE RW
0 Reheat Totals (FB0x;RH) for the individual relay outputs in energizing reheat
stages

RAM Aux/Electric Energized Stages

EN FE R
NA Reheat displays the reheat stages that are currently energized

Stages Requiring Flow

EE Aux/Electric
FR FE RW defines by the appropriate bit setting which of the available reheat
15 Reheat
stages requires a positive flow indication

Stage Delay
EE Aux/Electric
ID FC RW shows the minimum amount of time, in minutes, before the next reheat
4.0 Reheat
stage will be energized

Maximum Supply Temperature

EE Aux/Electric
MX FC RW establishes a maximum supply duct temperature above which the
105.0 Reheat
reheats will de-energize

Reheat Offset
EE Aux/Electric specifies, in degrees, the offset from the calculated heating control
OF FC RW
1.5°F Reheat setpoint (FE00;HC) that determines the temperature below which
additional reheat stages can be energized

Reheat Mode
used to configure the SBC-VAV’s outputs for electric reheat
EE Aux/Electric
RO FE RW 0=Disabled
0 Reheat
1=2 stage electric reheat (K2 and 3)
2=2 stage electric reheat (K4 and 5)
3=4 stage electric reheat (K2,3,4 and 5)

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-29

FLOW SETPOINTS CHANNEL, FA01 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

FLOW SETPOINTS CHANNEL, FA01

FA01 SP for Windows
Data Type Access Store & Value Description
Attr. Location

Cooling Integration Constant

EE
CI FC RW Flow/Cooling shows the amount of proportional error history (0 to 100%) used to
5.0%
calculate the desired position for the cooling duct damper

EE Cooling Minimum Flow

CM FE RW Flow/Cooling
100 shows the allowable minimum (cooling) duct flow

Cooling Proportional Band

EE specifies, in degrees (0.0 to 25.5), the offset from the calculated cooling
CP FC RW Flow/Cooling
5.0°F control setpoint ;CC that determines the proportional band for damper
control

EE Cooling Maximum Flow

CX FE RW Flow/Cooling
500 shows the allowable maximum (cooling) duct flow

Heating Integration Constant

EE
HI FC RW Flow/Heating shows the amount of proportional error history (0 to 100%) used to
5.0%
calculate the desired position for the heating duct damper

EE Heating Minimum Flow

HM FE RW Flow/Heating
100 shows the allowable minimum heating duct flow during heating

Heating Proportional Band

EE specifies, in degrees (0.0 to 25.5), the offset from the calculated heating
HP FC RW Flow/Heating
5.0 control setpoint that determines the proportional band for the heating
duct damper control

EE Heating Maximum Flow

HX FE RW Flow/Heating
500 shows the allowable maximum heating duct flow during heating

Warm-up Integration Constant

EE
WI FC RW Flow/Warm-up shows the amount of proportional error history (0 to 100%) used to
10.0%
calculate the desired position for the heating duct damper

EE Warm-up Minimum Flow

WM FE RW Flow/Warm-up
300 shows the allowable minimum heating duct flow during warm-up heating

Warm-up Proportional Band

EE specifies in degrees (0.0 to 25.5) the offset from the calculated heating
WP FC RW Flow/Warm-up
5.0°F control setpoint that determines the proportional band for the warm-up
heating duct damper control

Warm-up Maximum Flow

EE
WX FE RW Flow/Warm-up shows the allowable maximum heating duct flow during warm-up
700
heating.

EE Min Flow Overrides

MD FE RW Flow/Unoccupied
0 defines the application for flow override during unoccupied periods.

Unoccupied Minimum Flow

EE
UM FE RW Flow/Unoccupied defines the minimum flow that the VAV should follow for schedule
0
periods other than occupied.

A-30 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES INDOOR AIR QUALITY, FA01

INDOOR AIR QUALITY, FA01

Store & SP for Windows

FA01 Data Type Access Description
Default Location

Flow/Indoor Air Air Quality Setpoint

AS FE RW EE
Quality specifies the acceptable CO2 level in the zone

Air Quality Deadband

Flow/Indoor Air
DB FE RW EE
Quality specifies the CO2 variable range over which the control of the damper is
stroked

Air Quality Damper Ramp Rate

Flow/Indoor Air specifies the percentage rate per minute that the damper moves to
RP FE RW EE
Quality
compensate for the change in CO2 levels

Flow/Indoor Air Air Quality Control Max Air Flow

AM FE RW EE
Quality specifies the allowable maximum air flow

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-31

FLOW CHANNEL, FA00 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

FLOW CHANNEL, FA00

FA00 Store & SP for Windows
Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Control Mode
when set for Auto, the Target Flow (FA00;CD) is determined by the
control algorithms and setpoints
EE
AC FE RW Flow/Control
1
0=Manual
1=Auto
2=Tracking

RAM Actuator Status

AS FE R Flow/Damper
NA reports the status of the actuator as determined by the MMT

EE
AT FE RW Flow/Damper Actuator Type defines the type and connection for the damper actuator
0

RAM Average Flow

CA FE R Flow/Control
NA shows the measured average flow in cfm

Calibrate Flow Sensor?

allows a host or operator to manually calibrate the flow sensor
RAM
CB FE RW Flow/Control
0
0=No
1=Yes

RW
Target Flow
with RAM
CD FE Flow/Control shows the desired flow (cfm) setpoint calculated by the cooling or
manual NA
heating PI loops
CAV

EE Duct Scaling Factor

CK FE RW Flow/Control
768 shows the scaling factor for the particular VAV box being used

R
RAM
CV FE (RW if Flow/Control Current Value shows the current measured amount of airflow in cfm
NA
OI=1)

Damper Control
defines the method used to control the damper. For 'Pressure
EE Dependant' mode (FA00;DC=0) the damper position is estimated based
DC FE RW Flow/Damper
0 on the target flow (FA00;CD) and the estimated maximum flow
(FA00;EF). In 'Measured Flow' mode (FA00;DC=1 default) the damper is
modulated to maintain the target flow (FA00;CD).

EE
DD FE RW Flow/Damper Direction used to set the direction of the damper motor
0

Damper Mode
can be used to command the damper to fully open or to operate at
minimum or maximum cooling, heating and warm-up setpoints
Flow/Control
0=automatic
EE 1=open fully
DM FE RW and
0 2=cooling minimum flow
3=cooling maximum flow
Flow/Damper
4=heating minimum flow
5=heating maximum flow
6=warm-up minimum flow
7=warm-up maximum flow

Damper Position
RAM
DP FE R Flow/Damper shows the damper position with an optional actuator having a built in
NA
feedback potentiometer

EE Estimated Flow at Full Open

EF FE RW Flow/Damper
700 shows the estimated flow at full open in cfm

A-32 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES FLOW CHANNEL, FA00

FA00 Store & SP for Windows

Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Estimated Target Position

RAM shows the estimated target position with which the loop should control
EP FE R Flow/Damper
NA the valve to bring the measured input variable closer to the setpoint. A
change in EP causes the valve to drive in the proper control direction.

Fan
controls the current status of the fan output
RAM
FC FE RW Flow/Control
0
0=Off
1=On

Flow Hysteresis
EE
FH FE RW Flow/Control specifies the maximum amount of flow sensor variation to be tolerated
20
by the SBC-VAV before it shows a valid change of flow

2-Point Calibration
accepts a measured CFM value that is at least 100 CFM different than
RAM
K2 FE RW Flow/Control that last entered in FA00;KC. Both this measured CFM value and that
NA
entered in FA00;KC are then used to calibrate. This provides for an
improved flow calibration.

1-Point Calibration
RAM when you enter the cfm value measured externally, this will
KC FE RW Flow/Control
NA automatically adjust the Duct Scaling Factor (FA00;CK) based on the
present flow reading to properly scale the duct

Flow Offset
Defines an offset or adjustment applied to the target flow. When
EE
OF FF RW Flow/Control operated in Auto (FA00;AC=1) or Tracking (FA00;AC=2) mode the Flow
0
Offset is added to the derived target. The Target Flow (FA00;CD)
includes this offset.

Override Current Value?

allows a host or operator to manually set the value of the current flow
EE
OI FE RW Flow/Control
0
0=No
1=Yes

Rejuvenate Count
RAM
RZ FE R Flow/Damper when MMT detects the possibility of an actuator short, electrical pulses
NA
are used in an attempt to rejuvenate the motor

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-33

SCHEDULES CHANNELS, F901-F906 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

SCHEDULES CHANNELS, F901-F906

F901-
Store & SP for Windows
F906 Data Type Access Description
Default Location
Attr.

Active Days
EE
AD E9 RW Schedules/1-6 Day-of-week map specifying which of eight possible days of the week
M,T,W,T,F
(seven days plus holiday) that the schedule is active

All-Day Override
EE
AO FE RW Schedules/1-6 this attribute is used to override the schedule in WO, OC, UN and NS for
0
active days

Current Mode
indicates the current state of the schedule:
RAM
CV FE R Schedules/1-6 0 = unoccupied mode
NA
1 = warm-up
2 = occupied mode
3 = night setback

EE Night Setback
NS E6 RW Schedules/1-6
19:00 start time in short military format when night setback should begin

EE Occupied Time
OC E6 RW Schedules/1-6
08:00 start time in short military format when occupied mode should begin

EE Unoccupied Time
UN E6 RW Schedules/1-6
17:00 start time in short military format when unoccupied mode should begin

EE Warm-up Time
WO E6 RW Schedules/1-6
07:00 start time in short military format when warm-up mode should begin

A-34 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES SCHEDULES CHANNEL, F900

SCHEDULES CHANNEL, F900

F900 Store & SP for Windows
Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Active Schedule Bitmap

displays the currently active schedules in bitmap form

bit #0=F901
RAM Schedules/
AS E9 R bit #1=F902
NA Summary
bit #2=F903
bit #3=F904
bit #4=F905
bit #5=F906

RAM Schedules/ Current Value of Schedule 1

C1 FE R
NA Summary reflects the current value of F901;CV

RAM Schedules/ Current Value of Schedule 2

C2 FE R
NA Summary reflects the current value of F902;CV

RAM Schedules/ Current Value of Schedule 3

C3 FE R
NA Summary reflects the current value of F903;CV

RAM Schedules/ Current Value of Schedule 4

C4 FE R
NA Summary reflects the current value of F904;CV

RAM Schedules/ Current Value of Schedule 5

C5 FE R
NA Summary reflects the current value of F905;CV

RAM Schedules/ Current Value of Schedule 6

C6 FE R
NA Summary reflects the current value of F906;CV

Current Value for Schedule

RAM Schedules/
CV FE R read only attribute that displays the present schedule operating state of
NA Summary
the SBC-VAV as determined by priority checking

Day of the Week specifies the current day of the week as a number
from 0–7; must be set by a host controller for proper operation (default
invalid):

bit #0 = Monday
RAM Schedules/Clock/ bit #1 = Tuesday
DA FE RW
NA Calendar bit #2 = Wednesday
bit #3 = Thursday
bit #4 = Friday
bit #5 = Saturday
bit #6 = Sunday
bit #7 = Holiday

Schedules/Clock/
DH FE RW RAM Holiday toggles the holiday status for the current day
Calendar

RAM Schedules/Clock/ Current Date

DT E4 RW
NA Calendar specifies the current date in MM/DD/YY format.

Programmed Holiday
EE Schedules/Clock/
H0-H9 E4 RW is a specified date to be considered a holiday. Set the date to 0/0/YY to
0/0/00 Calendar
ignore.

Host Overrides Local Schedule?

EE Schedules/ specifies whether the SBC-VAV will operate from its local schedules or
HE FE RW
0 Summary from a host on the network: 0 = CV is set by schedules F901–F906, 1 =
CV is set by HO (ZE must = 0)

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-35

SCHEDULES CHANNEL, F900 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

F900 Store & SP for Windows

Data Type Access Description
Attr. Default Location

Host Schedule Setting

specifies the desired schedule override state of the SBC-VAV when HE
= 1:
RAM Schedules/
HO FE RW
0 Summary 0 = unoccupied
1 = warm-up
2= occupied
3 = night setback

Inactive Schedule
EE Schedules/ specifies which of the four possible schedule modes is used by the
IS FE RW
3 Summary SBC-VAV schedules during inactive schedule periods (when current day
of the week is not an active day)

Time
RAM Schedules/Clock/
TM E6 RW specifies the current system time (HH:MM) in military format from 00:00
NA Calendar
to 23:59 (default invalid)

Receive Schedule
EE Schedules/ used to set the current schedule mode for the entire zone from the
ZE FE RW
0 Summary network broadcast of a controller capable of broadcasting zone
schedule information to multiple SBC-VAVs in the zone

A-36 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES NETWORK CHANNEL, F005

NETWORK CHANNEL, F005

Store & SP for Windows
F005 Data Type Access Description
Default Location

Current Value
RAM Network/Schedule
CV FE R shows the current value of the network broadcast schedule values
0 Broadcast
received by the SBC-VAV

Receive Broadcast?
enables the SBC-VAV to receive network broadcasts and sets the
EE Network/Schedule F900;CV value based on the received value
RB FE RW
0 Broadcast
0=No
1=Yes

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) A-37

NETWORK CHANNEL, F005 APPENDIX A: PUP CHANNELS AND ATTRIBUTES

A-38 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)

 APPENDIX B: PUP DATA TYPES
This Appendix lists the hexadecimal and decimal PUP numeric data type codes. The hexadecimal
codes are followed by h and the decimal codes are provided in parentheses.

Code Digit Format Meaning

FFh (255) ±XXXXXXXXXX. signed 10 digit

FEh (254) XXXXXXXXXX. unsigned 10 digit

FDh (253) ±XXXXXXXXX.X signed 9.1 digit

FCh (252) XXXXXXXXX.X unsigned 9.1 digit

FBh (251) ±XXXXXXXX.XX signed 8.2 digit

FAh (250) XXXXXXXX.XX unsigned 8.2 digit

F9h (249) ±XXXXXXX.XXX signed 7.3 digit

F8h (248) XXXXXXX.XXX unsigned 7.3 digit

F7h (247) ±XXXXXX.XXXX signed 6.4 digit

F6h (246) XXXXXX.XXXX unsigned 6.4 digit

F5h (245) ±XXXXX.XXXXX signed 5.5 digit

F4h (244) XXXXX.XXXXX unsigned 5.5 digit

F3h (243) ±XXXX.XXXXXX signed 4.6 digit

F2h (242) XXXX.XXXXXX unsigned 4.6 digit

F1h (241) ±XXX.XXXXXXX signed 3.7 digit

F0h (240) XXX.XXXXXXX unsigned 3.7 digit

EFh (239) ±XX.XXXXXXXX signed 2.8 digit

EEh (238) XX.XXXXXXXX unsigned 2.8 digit

EDh (237) ±X.XXXXXXXXX signed 1.9 digit

ECh (236) X.XXXXXXXXX unsigned 1.9 digit

EBh (235) ±XXXXXXXXXX signed .10 digit

EAh (234) .XXXXXXXXXX unsigned .10 digit

E9h (233) channel map one bit per channel

E8h (232) bitmap of text one bit per text field

SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012) B-1

APPENDIX B: PUP DATA TYPES

Code Digit Format Meaning

E7h (231) BCD (H/S/M) hours is LSB

E6h (230) BCD (H/M) hours is LSB

E5h (229) packed BCD 8 BCD digits as 4 bytes

MSW is year
E4h (228) BCD date (Y/M/D) LSW/MSB is month
LSW/LSB is day

MSW is year
E3h (227) Binary date LSW/MSB is month
LSW/LSB is day

E2h (226) reserved

E1h (225) reserved

E0h (224) IEEE 784 32-bit floating point

DFh-00h (223-0) reserved

B-2 SBC-VAV(r/t/a/f) User Manual (4/12/2012)